To inquire about Time Wave software in both Macintosh and DOS versions please
contact Blue Water Publishing at 1-800-366-0264. fax# (503) 538-8485.

or write:
P.O. Box 726
Newberg, OR 97132

Passage from The Poetry and Prose of William Blake, edited by David V. Erdman.
Commentary by Harold Bloom. Copyright © 1965 by David V. Erdman and Harold
Bloom. Published by Doubleday Company, Inc. Used by permission.

THE INVISIBLE LANDSCAPE: Mind, Hallucinogens, and the I Ching. Copyright © 1975,
1993 by Dennis J. McKenna and Terence K. McKenna. All rights reserved. Printed in the
United States of America. No part of this book may be used or reproduced in any manner
whatsoever without written permission except in the case of brief quotations embodied in
critical articles and reviews. For information address HarperCollins Publishers, 10 East
53rd Street, New York, NY 10022.

Interior design by Margery Cantor and Jaime Robles

FIRST PUBLISHED IN 1975 BY THE SEABURY PRESS
FIRST HARPERCOLLINS EDITION PUBLISHED IN 1993

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
McKenna, Terence K., 1946-

The Invisible landscape : mind, hallucinogens, and the I ching /
Terence McKenna and Dennis McKenna.—1st HarperCollins ed.

p. cm.

Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 0-06-250635-8 (acid-free paper)

1. I ching. 2. Mind and body. 3. Shamanism. I. Oeric, O. N.
II. Title.

BF161.M47 1994

133—dc2o                                                                            93-5195

CIP

01 02 03 04 05 RRD(H) 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

In Memory of our dear Mother

Thus were the stars of heaven created like a golden chain
To bind the Body of Man to heaven from falling into the Abyss.
Each took his station and his course began with sorrow care.

In sevens tens fifties, hundreds, thousands, number'd all

According to their various powers, subordinate to Urizen

And to his sons in their degrees to his beauteous daughters,

Travelling in silent majesty along their order'd ways

In right lined paths outmeasur'd by proportions of number, weight

And measure, mathematic motions wondrous along the deep,

In fiery pyramid, or Cube, or unornamented pillar square

Of fire, far shining, travelling along even to its destin'd end;

Then falling down a terrible space, recovering in winter dire

Its wasted strength, it back returns upon a nether course,

Till fir'd with ardour fresh recruited in its humble season,

It rises up on high all summer, till its wearied course

Turns into autumn. Such the period of many worlds.

Others triangular, right angled course maintain. Others obtuse

Acute, Scalene, in simple paths; others move

In intricate ways, biquadrate, Trapeziums, Rhombs, Rhomboids,

Parallelograms triple quadruple, polygonic,

In their amazing hard subdu'd course in the vast deep.

Foreword to the 1994 edition

When I was researching my history of the psychedelic movement, I pur-
sued many odd and forgotten books. Most were easily obtained, either
from libraries or used bookstores. One, however, proved elusive. Written
by two brothers, Dennis and Terence McKenna, it was called The Invisible
landscape, and it had great posthumous word of mouth. Now there's a
truly heavy book, the owner of one bookstore devoted to mysticism and
consciousness told me when I queried him about it. Haven't seen one in
years.

Which is about how long it took me to find my copy. In Boston. My
cry of wild exultation lifting heads all over the bookstore.

The bibliophiles among you will appreciate the keen anticipation I felt
as I carried it to a nearby cafe and cracked it open and discovered that, in-
deed, this was a truly heavy book.

Dense. Technical. Fascinating. Infuriating. Marvelously weird.

Mixed in with theories drawn from the study of schizophrenia, molecu-
lar biology, and ethnobotany were pungent disquisitions on shamanism
and psychedelic philosophy. Plus what seemed to be a story about an en-
counter with an insectoid intelligence who had curious things to say about
the nature of time\ The closest thing I could compare it to was an alchemi-
cal text published (in the classic period—the seventeenth century—before
the bonds linking science and magic were severed, when it was still possible
to have a scientist magician on the order of Isaac Newton.

Since that first reading, I have met the authors of The Invisible Land-
scape. Though I have never seen them together, I'm told they're one of the
great brother acts on the planet. Dennis is the scientific McKenna—the
one with the doctorate in psychopharmacology—slow-spoken, factual.
Terence is the quicksilver poet-philosopher McKenna. He's what I imag-
ine George Bernard Shaw might have been like if Shaw had been born in
the American West in the 1940s and educated at Berkeley in the psyche-
delic '60s.

Cast your mind back to that milieu as you begin this book. Back to
those few months when there was a steep plunge into novelty, as Terence
McKenna might say, that carried the most restless minds of the Baby
Boom with it. Back to when the possibility that the world could be re-
made sparkled in the sunshine of what will seem to be, as it recedes into
history, a time of perpetual summer—the summer of love, of Woodstock,

of massive spring marches through cherry-blossomed Washington to levi-
tate the Pentagon.

Our appetite for simplicity has caused us to compress the chaos of the
'60s into one monolithic Youth Revolt. But there were two philosophies
then among the revolutionaries on how the world might be remade. One
path, endorsed by the political activists, advocated a traditional Western
strategy: seizing political power and using that vantage to raise conscious-
ness and save the world. The other path proposed an attack on con-
sciousness itself using a controversial and soon outlawed family of
psychochemicals—the psychedelics.

Hippies and activists. Could a society heal its social ills without first
addressing its own internal flaws? As Tim Leary, perhaps the most cele-
brated spokesman of this second option, put it: If all the Negroes and
left-wing college students in the world had Cadillacs and full control of
society, they would still be involved in an anthill social system unless they
opened themselves up.

Opened up.

There in a nutshell was the problem vis-a-vis a psychedelic politics: these
substances opened up much too much. They were a doorway into a uni-
verse of strange and sometimes terrifying information. These were not facile
tools; rather, they were an invitation to explorers, and a percentage of the
Baby Boom's best and brightest responded by turning into mind wanderers,
seeking adventure in the unclaimed real estate of the imagination.

Such was the case with our two authors, who were convinced that the
future of the species could best be secured through a transformation of
consciousness.

We believed that the widespread use of psychedelic drugs in mod-
ern society was somehow rooted to the intuition that exploration
and reassimilation of so-called magical dimensions was the next
valid step in humanity's collective search for liberation.

They focused their work on the psychedelic dimethyltryptamine, or
DMT. They were curious about DMT's apparent stimulation of the lan-
guage centers of the brain. Not only was glossolalia (speaking in tongues)
common, but sometimes one encountered dancing molecular forms that
seemed to be made out of visible language.

Is it any wonder they were entranced?

One day, the McKennas came across a description of the shamanic
usage of the tryptamine-containing plant ayahuasca in an anthropological

monograph about a tribe in the upper Amazon Basin. According to the
Jivero shamans, ayahuasca induced a state of consciousness in which a flu-
orescent violet substance was generated, and this substance allowed them
to work their magic.

From this apercu an expedition grew.

It took years for the journey to jell, but in 1971, joined by three friends,
the McKennas embarked on a trek up the Amazon to investigate the
shamanic usage of such shamanic power plants as ayahuasca.

None of us was yet twenty-five years old. We had been drawn
together through the political turmoil that had characterized our
years shared in Berkeley.... We had sorted through the ideological
options, and had decided to put all of our chips on the psyche-
delic experience as the shortest path to the millennium, which our
politics had inflamed us to hope for.

I'm giving nothing away by telling you that things didn't work out as
planned, that the little expedition never even reached its target village,
that it was sidetracked, that they discovered instead a strange mushroom,
the ingestion of which provoked the events that The Invisible Landscape
attempts to explain. They embarked upon a serious lark and ended up
stumbling across the alien, the mysterious, the other. Deep in the forest. A
long, long way from civilization.

The complete telling of this story, which strikes me as one of the arche-
typal stories of the Baby Boom generation, is contained in Terence
McKennas True Hallucinations, a book that was composed in the fullness
of time, years after the occurrence of the events it describes. The McKen-
nas' initial response, however, is in the book you now hold in your hands.

In his preface to the German edition of The Invisible Landscape, Dennis
McKenna says:

The book was written in dead earnest by two individuals strug-
gling to come to grips with a deluge of ideas triggered by a very
personal and idiosyncratic experience. No one is more aware than
myself that certain passages read like the musings of a naive and

scientifically untutored student...Even though the passage of

nearly twenty years since these ideas were first committed to paper
have lent a certain perspective, and have made me less willing to
insist on the veracity of these concepts as revealed truth, it is still
not an admission that is easily made.

Revealed truth. What happened to the McKennas up the Amazon was
one of those sudden, shattering discontinuities that sever the recipient from
normal time, normal experience, and usually force a complete rewriting of
one's life. Time is separated into those things that occurred before the reve-
lation and those things that have come after—the aftershocks.

The Invisible Landscape is the McKennas' first attempt to wrestle with
this revelation using the handholds of Western science and philosophy.
They may seem to use these disciplines in an uncharacteristic and perhaps
naive way, but what strikes me more is the ingenious and sometimes
brilliantly intuitive application of these methods by two kids who were
only in their early twenties.

Nowadays, whenever some fossil starts giving me that Allan-Bloom-
Closing-of-the-American -Mind-it's-all-the-fault-of-the-sixties'-generation
rap, I plan to hand him The Invisible Landscape and suggest he chew
through a few chapters before we chat further about declining standards.

What these fossils would find is a book divided into three sections. The
first is Dennis McKennas attempt to understand the psychedelic effects of
the mushroom revelation in neurobiological terms. Dennis was interested
in the cellular and molecular changes that accompanied the altered state,
assuming that the dozens of techniques humans used to promote these
states were just different ways of triggering the same organic process. Just
different roads to the top of the same mountain.

The second part of the book is Terence's attempt both to understand
the mushroom revelation and to assess whether it possibly could be true.
A taste of the text is in order here.

We could feel the presence of some invisible hyperspatial entity, an
ally, which seemed to be observing and sometimes exerting influ-
ence on the situation to keep us moving gently toward an experi-
mental resolution of the ideas we were generating. Because of the
alien nature of the tryptamine trance, its seeming accentuation of
themes alien, insectile, and futuristic, and because of previous expe-
riences with tryptamine in which insectile hallucinatory transforma-
tions of human beings were observed, we were led to speculate that
the role of the presence was somehow like that of an anthropologist,
come to give humanity the keys to galactarian citizenship.

This strange insectoid intelligence gently directed our authors to study
the King Wen sequence of the / Ching, which just happens to be the old-
est sequence in that ancient divinatory tool. What they found there

(maybe I am giving away too much of the mystery now) was a pattern, a
rhythm, a rhythm moving through time, maybe the key to time itself—a
rhythm that danced its way through the millennia toward an omega point
that the McKennas calculated to be the year 2012.

Which brings us to the third part of the book, the computer program
that describes the mathematics from which the McKennas derive this
conclusion. In the long years between the first and second editions of The
Invisible Landscape, our authors have turned their mathematical model
into a computer program that runs on most PCs. The first time Terence
demonstrated the Timewave Zero software for me, he said something like,
My God, man, what if it's true? And even if it isn't, you've still got a great
computer game.

Perhaps you're beginning to see what I mean when I call this book
dense, technical, fascinating, infuriating. Marvelously weird.

Jay Stevens

Weathersfield Bow, Vermont

Preface to the 1994 edition

Someone encountering this book for the first time is certain to find that
many, if not most, of the ideas and concepts discussed are extremely pecu-
liar. The speculations in it are so radically outside the mainstream of mod-
ern scientific and philosophical thought that you may wonder whether
this book is really meant as a sort of parody of serious scientific discourse.
Let me hasten to reassure the baffled: The book you hold in your hands
was written in dead earnest by two individuals struggling to come to grips
with a deluge of ideas triggered by a very personal and idiosyncratic expe-
rience. No one is more aware than myself that certain passages read like
the musings of a scientifically untutored student, while others are perhaps
more indicative of the associations of an unhinged mind.

Indeed, it must be admitted that both operative modes played a role in
the fashioning of the speculations which this work sets forth. Even though
the passage of nearly twenty years since these ideas were first committed to
paper have lent a certain perspective, and have made me less willing to in-
sist on the veracity of these concepts as revealed truth, it is still not an ad-
mission that is easily made. I would like to think that those years have
brought with them some small degree of intellectual maturity, and per-
haps a certain humility. The writing of a book which purports to explain
all and everything, as this one does, is a task best left to the young, for
whom such pedestrian considerations as scientific rigor and credibility are
mere impediments.

Having acquired considerable formal training in both the theory and
practice of science in the interim, I now realize that even that vaunted dis-
cipline may remain forever incapable of satisfactorily accounting for the
simplest, most basic elements of everyday existence: our experience of life,
of mind, of being in the world. Science, by its very nature, is rendered un-
comfortable when faced with such questions, because it is intrinsically
suited to the examination of parts rather than wholes. Scientific scrutiny
can unlock the minutest details of each piece of the puzzle, but more po-
etic sensibilities must be called on to appreciate what it is to be a brain/
mind/body experiencing the marvelous totality of being in all of its
blooming, buzzing confusion.

It is in this respect that psychedelic drugs have been a major conun-
drum for science, and are likely to remain so for some time. For it is in

the phenomenon of the psychedelic experience that the irrefutable, self-
evident qualities of the mind come up hard against the reductionist
models of the molecular neurobiologist. While it seems clear that the
modalities of the psychedelic state must be rooted in neuronal pharm-
acodynamics, explanatory paradigms couched in terms of receptor selec-
tivities, structure/activity relationships, agonist/antagonist interactions,
activation of limbic substructures, etc., all somehow fail to do justice to
the transcendent, transformative reality that becomes manifest when one
actually consumes a psychedelic drug.

One possible approach to the resolution of this dilemma might be
termed the way of the shaman: one dispenses with all attempts at reduc-
tionist analysis and simply accepts the experience on its own terms, per-
haps as a divine revelation from a source outside the self—a god within a
plant, for instance. Indeed, the psychedelic experience is so profound and
overwhelming that even scientifically sophisticated individuals can easily
succumb to the misperception that the trip is in the drug. The alterna-
tive response, which might be characterized as the way of the alchemist, is
to become utterly obsessional in the seeking of reductive explanations,
and to construct wildly elaborate models in an attempt to integrate the ir-
reducible reality of what is experienced into some scientific or, more
often, quasi-scientific paradigm. This book tries, unsuccessfully perhaps,
to steer a middle course between these two approaches.

Nevertheless, though there is much within this work that I would no
longer attempt to defend as scientifically valid, there is also much food for
thought. The intuition that led Terence and me to write The Invisible
Landscape was that the key to the brain/mind problem and perhaps many
other questions of considerable ontological significance for our species lies
in a thorough understanding of the psychedelic experience, from its mole-
cular mechanisms to its historical and evolutionary implications. That
original intuition has remained a valid working hypothesis to this day, and
in fact has been the stimulus, at least in our lives, for most of our subse-
quent intellectual development. In that time we have partially revised our
interpretations of the precipitating causes and consequences of our experi-
ences, have acquired new information, and have examined alternative hy-
potheses ranging from the pharmacological to the mythical; but always
driving the searching and questioning has been the desire to understand
the nature of the psychedelic experience. We are, if anything, less assured
of the success of our quest today than when this book was written, but re-
main convinced that any model of the brain/mind that does not reconcile
the observations of neurobiology with the fact of the psychedelic state, as

it is experienced, is doomed to remain scientifically incomplete and philo-
sophically unsatisfying.

Psychedelic drugs have always been and remain the most useful molec-
ular probes available to science for exploring the relationship between the
subjective experience of mind and neurobiological processes. Given the
validity of this statement—and I suggest that no neuroscientist with per-
sonal knowledge of the psychedelic state would contest it—one cannot
fail to be puzzled by science's curious neglect of psychedelic research over
the last two decades. While it is true that in this era of government-
supported science, budgetary constraints and research priorities can influ-
ence which scientific problems are investigated and which are allowed to
languish, one suspects that more than benign neglect is behind the hiatus
in psychedelic research. Despite its pretensions to objectivity, science, like
any other human institution, places a certain vested interest in its own
self-preservation; thus it is likely to be less than enthusiastic, if not openly
hostile, toward any investigative strategy that could potentially call its
most basic assumptions into question. Psychedelic drugs exert their influ-
ence at the brain/mind/body interface, and are clearly well within that
shadowy and forbidden territory where cognition itself originates. Is it
any wonder that science hesitates to rip that veil aside and illuminate
those shadows with the cold light of reason—knowing that reason itself
may become the ultimate sacrifice for such audacity? It may be that the
psychedelic experience cannot be understood using only the reductionist
models of science, and that only by a conscious unification of the reduc-
tionist, analytical methods of science with the holistic, nonanalytical ap-
proach of the shaman can we hope to understand, appreciate, and apply
the lessons learned from such experiences. This book is a first, faltering,
step in that direction.

I am pleased that Terence and I again have the opportunity to make it
available for public scrutiny, even though it is a very different work from
the one I would write today, given the necessary time and freedom from
more immediate and pressing concerns. I urge that it be read with this
thought in mind: While there is much within these covers that would
have to be rejected in the light of new knowledge, there is also much that
is more supported by current scientific knowledge than it was nearly
twenty years ago. Examples that could be cited include the possible holo-
graphic nature of neural organization, retrograde axoplasmic transport,
the possible role of superconductivity and other quantum mechanical
processes in living systems, the intercalation of drug molecules into nu-
cleic acids, and the importance of oscillatory processes in regulating the

functions of nucleic acids and proteins. While none of these has actually
been incorporated into conventional scientific dogma, they are all active
areas of experimental investigation.

Scientific progress, and human understanding generally, is a self-
refining, exponentially accelerating process. The past two decades have
witnessed advances in scientific understanding that were scarcely imag-
ined when this book was written. It seems virtually certain that science
and human thinking will experience an even more radical transformation
over the next two decades. Ironically, the speculations in this book may re-
semble the result of that scientific and noetic (r)evolution more than the
unquestioned paradigms of current scientific knowledge.

Dennis J. McKenna
December 1988

Acknowledgments to the 1975 edition

The authors wish to express their grateful appreciation to the many friends
who aided this project. In South America we were assisted by Mr. Michael
Laski and Ms. Sarah Hartley and by the Naval del Sur de Colombia, whose
vessels often were our only means of transportation. The Witoto people of
La Chorrera and the Mission of La Chorrera were most hospitable, the for-
mer providing invaluable access to local psychoactive plants. Drs. Horatio
and Isabella Calle of the Universidad Nacional, Bogota, provided valu-
able information on the endemic tryptamines of Colombian Amazonas.
Thanks to the Octavio Luna family, who placed their country home at our
disposal for a portion of the time during which the manuscript was writ-
ten. Thanks especially to Luis Eduardo Luna, whose support and enthusi-
asm for these ideas helped greatly in their clarification.

Dr. Wolfram Eberhard kindly read and criticized chapter 8. Special
thanks to Richard Brzustowitz and Professor Erich Jantsch, both of
whom made many valuable suggestions and were most instrumental in
helping us secure publication. Ron Curry made several suggestions we
have used in the / Ching graph.

We especially acknowledge the contribution made by Erica Nietfeld.
She was a willing listener in the thousands of situations in which these
ideas unfolded and gave very generously of her energy in helping type and
order these pages.

Last, we wish to thank sincerely our editor, Dr. Justus George Lawler
of The Seabury Press. He has been most kind and patient throughout the
preparation of the manuscript. Friends too numerous to mention partic-
ipated in the years of conversation out of which these pages were forged.
To them, to Michael Malcolm, Elizabeth Hutchinson, Kevin Mahoney,
William Cole, Ernest and Barbara Waugh, John Parker, Jr., William
Patrick Watson, Martin Inn, Massayasu Takayama, Mark Skolnick, Ralph
Abraham, and all the others, many thanks.

Acknowledgments to the 1994 edition

I wish to express thanks and appreciation to all the people who helped to
make a new edition of The Invisible Landscape possible. Deep and special
thanks to Dan Levy, who pursued this project over several years and
through a number of jobs. Thanks also to my literary agents in New York,
John Brockman and Katinka Matson. For mathematics and programming
contributions, I owe a great debt to Peter Meyer, who translated my math-
ematical intuitions into C and thus defined the core algorithm of the
Timewave theory; to Billy Smith for HyperCard implementation of the
Timewave on the Macintosh; and to Peter Broadwell, who was the first to
implement the Timewave in a PC environment.

Peter Meyer especially has been a devoted explorer of the mathematics
and metaphysics behind the Timewave. His company, Dolphin Software
of Berkeley, California, has been very helpful by developing and marketing
the software that supports my mathematical ideas. Thanks also to Klaus
Scharff of Bergisch-Gladbach, Germany, for his mathematical insights.

Sincere thanks to my close friend Rupert Sheldrake, a theoretical biolo-
gist and scientific heretic, whose ideas concerning morphogenetic fields
and formative causation were instrumental in shaping my own concep-
tions of the Timewave and of the conservation of novelty as a universal
principle.

Over the years, I have given numerous seminars and weekend teaching
retreats on these subjects at New York's The Open Center, at Chicago's
Oasis, and at the Rim Institute in Payson, Arizona. Especially important
were the five-day sessions at Esalen Institute in Big Sur, California, in 1988
and 1991. For the time I spent at Esalen as a scholar in residence, from
1988 until 1992, during which discussion of these ideas was prominent, I'd
like to give special thanks to Esalen and to its programming director,
Nancy Lunney. To all those who attended my seminars and lectures over
the years I also give my thanks and appreciation.

At Harper San Francisco, I was supported by publishers Clayton Carl-
son and Tom Grady, and by my editor, Caroline Pincus. Thanks to Jaime
Robles for the new illustrations, which have taken difficult concepts and
made them very clear. The general look and feel of the book is due to de-
signer Margery Cantor. And once again, it was my great good fortune to

have Leslie Rossman as my publicist. Every author should be so blessed.
To all of you and to all the people unknown to me who worked to make
this book available once again I offer sincere thanks and appreciation.

Finally I want to thank my brother and coauthor, Dennis McKenna,
for his continued devotion to these themes and ideas throughout the
many years that have passed since the original experiment at La Chorrera.
His evolution into a research scientist with a distinguished record of scien-
tific discovery and publication has been a great source of satisfaction

to me.

Terence McKenna

Introduction to the 1994 edition

It has been eighteen years since the original 1975 publication of The Invisi-
ble Landscape. And it will be about nineteen years until the denouement
that will surely be the acid test for this series of psychedelically inspired
speculations. I have long struggled to maintain a suspended judgment on
these matters, yet I'm also aware that if nothing at all comes of this extra-
ordinary intellectual adventure, it will be a rather ironic comment on the
idea that nature does nothing in vain.

I believe that The Invisible Landscape remains our magnum opus, and
that it is monumental in its ambition to build a new system that integrates
all nature—animate, inanimate, social, and psychological—into one
mathematically coherent web of interconnected and evolving resonances.

The 1975 edition was small and its readership widely scattered. I hope
the evolution of scientific thinking and the new resurgence of interest in
shamanism and the use of psychotropic plants will contribute to an intel-
lectual climate in which the ideas of The Invisible Landscape will be fairly
examined and considered by a wider audience. My faith that the ideas ex-
plored here will be found to have an extraordinary explanatory and per-
suasive power remains unshaken. As for Truth, I will argue today—as I
did in 1971 at La Chorrera—that these ideas are, in Wittgenstein's won-
derful phrase, True enough.

Terence McKenna
Opihihale, Hawaii
November 1993

Introduction

The search for liberation, a paradisiacal state of freedom that mythology
insists is the ahistorical root of the historical process, has always been the
raison d'etre of the human species' conscious pilgrimage through time. In
the name of drawing near to this liberation, humankind has built and then
partially rejected an endless procession of societies, governments, philoso-
phies, and religions. The understanding of what form this liberation might
take has been in a constant state of refinement, often, if not always, evolv-
ing at cross purposes to itself, creating again and again situations wherein
systems in violent competition, and seemingly antithetical to each other,
sought the same goal—a goal always reducible to this complex idea, libera-
tion. Systems as divergent as Buddhism and Marxism, National Socialism
and Christianity, have all claimed possession of a set of concepts that
would in some sense free their practitioners. The entire human experi-
ence, individual and collective, can be described as the pursuit of that
which frees.

It has not been a search without success; it may be said that although
progress is erratic, nevertheless each successive age has expanded our under-
standing of the nature of being and freedom. Monotheism, as it developed
in the West, freed early humans from the nearly complete domination of
consciousness by the pan-vitalistic animism seen everywhere resident in
Nature. The coming of Christianity freed its adherents from the fear of a
wrathful and paternalistic god. Similarly, the modern era offered freedom
from the dogmatic stasis of late medieval Catholicism. It may be argued
that each of these events, rather than advancing humans along the path to-
ward liberation, had quite the opposite effect, and, in fact, each step down
the path of history has led deeper into time and away from the paradise in
illo tempore. However, viewed objectively, the historical process may be seen
as the expansion of cross-cultural contacts between various peoples and a
resultant sharing of a continuously growing pool of information, ideas,
and myths. This body of inherited and shared information represents our
collective understanding of the nature of our species' conscious journey
through time. As such, each new epoch, each new religion or philosophy,
however much it may appear to erode the search for liberation in its own
right, as an addition to the racial collectivity of conscious information,
represents advance. Although our entire being is caught up in the pursuit
of liberation, we share no collective understanding of what this liberation

might be. The search is reflected on all levels within our species and is in-
tensely present in each of us as individuals. Whether Marxist or mystic,
each of us pursues those threads of thought that seem, subject to our own
uniqueness, to be fruitful in leading to this liberation.

The personal response to this situation by the authors of this book has
been to follow the nostalgia for paradise through a survey of the ideas
associated with shamanism and pharmacology, with frequent forays into

apparently distant fields.

During 1970 our thinking coalesced to a point where we felt that a
basic reconstitution of culture, while theoretically possible through an ar-
chaic holo-cybernetic revolution, was practically impossible, given the in-
transigence of power elites and the lack of direction evinced by putative
revolutionaries. Our interest then centered upon primitive societies where
a connection with the timeless world of the unconscious is maintained
through the office of the shaman, the technician of the sacred. We be-
lieved that the widespread use of psychedelic drugs in modern society was
somehow rooted to the intuition that exploration and reassimilation of so-
called magical dimensions was the next valid step in humanity's collective
search for liberation. Our studies centered upon tribal peoples who had a
highly refined tradition of shamanism and the use of psychotropic sub-
stances. Practical experience indicated that entry into the separate reality
or the nonordinary reality of the shamanic cosmology was most easily
achieved through the use of hallucinogenic tryptamines. To investigate
this assumption, we organized, early in 1971, an expedition to the Upper
Amazon Basin to locate sources of organic tryptamines and to explore their
possible relevance to the search for liberation into eschatological time.

Our intuition was that the physical interaction of mind and brain, and
its potential for manipulation through hallucinogenic drugs, might pro-
vide a situation where new and radical experimental approaches could
shed light on problems still largely unelucidated, problems such as the
relation of metabolism to mind and the molecular nature of memory and
recall. We hoped to create a model of mind and its parameters that would
be neither reductionist nor exclusive of paranormal phenomena. Indeed,
in the institution of shamanism we felt that the normal and the paranor-
mal were somehow merged, and in the shamanic world, physical mani-
pulation of psychic space via hallucinogens is raised to the level of
science —more precisely of a folk science. We assumed that the merging
of the normal and the paranormal and the use of hallucinogens were di-
rectly related. Unlike most researchers, we did not seek to reduce the
paranormal aspects of the shamans world to mere psychologisms; instead,

we set out with the open-ended premise that in matters as mysterious as
the nature of mind, surprises might well be in store. We sought to experi-
ence shamanic phenomena on whatever level of existential validity they
could present themselves. We were not wrong in anticipating that what
we would encounter would leave our own culture-bound categories se-
verely strained. This book attempts to present the assumptions that led us
to the Amazon and to describe our research there.

We assumed that mind and life are rooted in a bioelectronic field phe-
nomenon, since a corpse is similar to a living body except for the latter's
bioelectronic continuum of energy exchange and metabolism. We hoped
to understand the mechanics of the mutual interrelatedness of mind and
the organic matrix at formative submolecular junctures. If, as we postu-
late, mind and its contents, both conscious and unconscious, reside some-
where in the structure or dynamics of the genetic matrix, then it would be
useful to seek a means of enhancing access to those portions of the genetic
apparatus where the unconscious mind, both personal and collective,
may be seated. As is common knowledge, numerous techniques of mind
expansion, from drugs to yoga, have been devised to make unconscious
portions of the mind available for conscious contemplation. Nearly all of
these seem to involve the induction of some biophysical alteration of the
condition of the organism, and it is likely that the change at the cellular
and molecular level is the same whatever the technique employed. If, in-
deed, some molecular mechanism is capable of unlocking the realms of
the personal and collective unconscious, then the understanding and ap-
plication of such a process would be of tremendous benefit in the search
for human liberation. Our own understanding of our Amazon experiences
is that they seem, however cryptically, to argue strongly that the liberation
whose attainment is the very motivation of conscious life is a more tangi-
ble thing than we had thought possible.

It will be useful, for purposes of clarification, to divide the work in
which we were engaged at La Chorrera into three categories, which can
then be discussed independently of each other—though certainly in our
own subjective experience, during the experiment and since, these categor-
ies have tended to migrate toward each other, leading, as we anticipated, to
an understanding that seems to hover at the very edge of language while
being clearly rooted in the sphere of cognition. We have thought it reason-
able to attempt to discuss this work on three levels, made only as distinct
as is necessary for its comprehension, and understanding further that in
our subjective experience, these levels were not distinct at all. These cate-
gories may be thought of as (1) the actual biophysical experiment, (2) the

subjective psychological experience triggered by the experiment, and (3)
the continuum graphs of the evolution of change in space-time that are the
objective content derived from our attempts to investigate the bioelec-
tronic constellation of mind. These graphs seem to imply a possible eco-
logical crisis within the community of species that may make access to the
shamanic dimension a fact of historical fatedness of unique importance
for humankind.

Before these categories can be usefully discussed, some of the principles
and methodological assumptions that provided an investigative set of tools
for these shamanic researches will be discussed.

Any sort of investigative procedure, whether it be the analysis of the
physical world or the exploration of interior realms, is accomplished
through the application of some methodology, which in turn is founded
on philosophical premises. More often than not, the philosophical as-
sumptions entailed in the practice of science are not made explicit; the
hypothesis and experimental procedures and results are presented without
articulating the philosophical bias underlying them. Our investigations
are concerned with explicating the nature of mind, ideas, and conscious-
ness concepts, which, by their very elusiveness, demand the construction
of philosophical postulates. The chapters in Part One are devoted to an
exposition of the philosophical and operational biases that influenced and
guided our investigations. Chapter 1 focuses on the traditional figure of
the shaman as he is found in primitive societies, while chapter 2 presents
a comparison of the shaman and the schizophrenic. The shaman and the
schizophrenic both seem to possess a greater access to unconscious pro-
cesses than the normal individual. While the schizophrenic is spontane-
ously inundated and often overwhelmed by these processes, the shaman,
through the practice of his techniques of ecstasy, is able to integrate
them into consciousness and to maintain access to them without suffer-
ing personality disintegration. If some fundamentally similar molecular
process is responsible for the release of unconscious contents in each case,
then the figure of the shaman is worthy of close study for his ability to
trigger and control this process.

Because the temptation to treat the concept of mind in vague and ill-
defined terms is a powerful one, chapters 3 and 4 attempt to delineate our
understanding of the nature of mind. Chapter 3 itself deals with some
methodological and philosophical assumptions of science that must be
made explicit if science is to address the complex phenomenon of mind. An

alternative metaphysic, consistent with a quantum mechanical understand-
ing of mind at its primary levels, is advanced as the basis for a scientific
methodology able to pursue an experimental and empirical investigation
of mind. The ontological premises outlined in chapter 3 do not arise de
novo from the substratum of individualistic speculation; on the contrary,
they are based on the process-oriented organismic philosophical tradi-
tion that finds its most eloquent expression in the thought of Alfred North
Whitehead. The metaphysical and philosophical concepts presented in
this chapter will, accordingly, closely reflect some central themes of White-
head's thought. Chapter 4 finds in the properties of holography new prin-
ciples of organization that provide useful models for understanding the
structure of both brain and mind. Chapter 5 enlarges upon the discussion
of brain-mind organization and advances a tentative hypothesis of neuro-
transmitter and drug activity that attempts to explain how higher cortical
experience could be modulated at the molecular level. Chapter 6 describes
the procedures and results of our experimental attempt to expand the
scope of consciousness through manipulation of the biophysical state of
the human organism. The final chapter in Part One deals with our per-
sonal and subjective reaction to the experiment at La Chorrera.

The Figure of the Shaman

Of all the diverse religious institutions that humans have elaborated since
before the beginning of recorded history, that of shamanism is one of the
most singular and is probably one of the most archaic as well. The sha-
man is something of a maverick among religious practitioners. While
shamanism occurs in virtually every culture on the planet, manifesting
itself in religious traditions both ancient and modern, both primitive
and sophisticated, the shaman remains eminently individualistic, idiosyn-
cratic, and enigmatic, standing ever apart from organized ecclesiastical in-
stitutions while still performing important functions for the psychic and
religious life of the culture. Comparable, but not identical, with such sim-
ilar idiosyncratic practitioners as medicine men and sorcerers, the shaman
is the possessor of techniques of proven efficacy and of powers bordering
on the paranormal, the complete understanding of which still eludes
modern psychology. It is this complex and fascinating figure of the sha-
man that we want to analyze from a standpoint at once sympathetic, in-
terpretative, and psychological, with a view to answering the following
questions: (1) What are the traditional aspects of shamanism as it is en-
countered in primitive cultures? (2) What is the nature of the shamanic
personality and abilities, and what is the psychological role of the shaman
in the society at large? And (3) Are there institutions analogous to sha-
manism in modern society?

The vocation of shaman is found in nearly all archaic cultures, from
the Australian aborigines to the Jivaro Indians of central Ecuador and
Peru to the Yakut tribes of Siberia. It is believed to have originated among
these Siberian peoples, though its diffusion into other cultures must have
taken place very early in prehistory for, along with sorcerers, magicians,
and priests, shamanism can be counted among the oldest of professions.

The word shaman is derived from the Tungusic term saman, derived
in its turn from the Pali samana, indicating a possibly Southern (Bud-
dhist) influence among these northern peoples (Eliade 1964, p. 4951). Eli-
ade distinguishes the shaman from other types of religious and magical
practitioners primarily on the basis of his religious function and tech-
niques: . . . he is believed to cure, like all doctors, and to perform mira-
cles of the fakir, like all magicians, whether primitive or modern. But
beyond this, he is a psychopomp, and he may also be priest, mystic, and
poet. He further defines the shaman as a manipulator of the sacred,

whose main function is to induce ecstasy in a society where ecstasy is the
prime religious experience. Thus, the shaman is a master of ecstasy, and
the art of shamanizing is a technique of ecstasy (Eliade 1964, p. 4).

In archaic societies, a person (either man or woman) may become a
shaman in primarily one of two ways: hereditary transmission or sponta-
neous election. In either case, the novice shaman must undergo an initia-
tory ordeal before he can attain the status of a full shaman. The initiation
generally has two aspects: an ecstatic aspect, which takes place in dreams
or trance, and a traditional aspect, in which the shaman is given instruc-
tion in certain techniques, such as the use and significance of the sha-
manic costume and drum, the secret spirit language, the names of the
helping spirits, techniques of curing, the uses of medicinal plants, and so
on, by an elder master shaman. These traditional techniques of shaman-
ism are not invariably transmitted by an elder shaman but may be im-
parted to the neophyte directly through the spirits that come to him
during his initiatory ecstasy. Lack of a public ritual in no way implies that
such traditional instruction is neglected.

The ecstatic part of the shaman's initiation is harder to analyze, for it
depends on a certain receptivity to states of trance and ecstasy on the part
of the novice: He may be moody, somewhat frail and sickly, predisposed
to solitude, and may perhaps have fits of epilepsy or catatonia, or some
other psychological aberrance (though not always, as some writers on the
subject have asserted [cf. Eliade 1964, pp. 23ff. and below]). In any case,
his psychological predisposition to ecstasy forms only the starting point
for his initiation: The novice, after a history of psychosomatic illness or
psychological aberration that may be more or less intense, will at last
begin to undergo initiatory sickness and trance; he will lie as though dead
or in deep sleep for days on end. During this time, he is approached in
dreams by his helping spirits and may receive instructions from them. In-
variably during this prolonged trance the novice will undergo an episode
of mystical death and resurrection: He may see himself reduced to a skele-
ton and then clothed with new flesh; or he may see himself boiled in a cal-
dron, devoured by the spirits, and then made whole again; or he may
imagine himself being operated on by the spirits, his organs removed and
replaced with magical stones, and then sewn up again.

Although the particular motifs may vary between cultures and even in-
dividuals, the general symbolism is clear: The novice shaman undergoes a
symbolic death and resurrection, which is understood as a radical transfor-
mation into a superhuman condition. Henceforth, the shaman enjoys ac-
cess to the supernatural plane; he is a master of ecstasy, can travel in the

spirit-realm at will, can cure and divine, can touch red-hot iron with im-
punity, and so on. In short, the shaman is transformed from a profane into
a sacred state of being. Not only has he effected his own cure through this
mystical transmutation, he is now invested with the power of the sacred,
and hence can cure others as well. It is of the first order of importance to
remember this, that the shaman is not merely a sick man, or a madman; he
is a sick man who has healed himself, who is cured, and who must
shamanize to remain cured. Lommel (1967) gives the following description
of a shamanic initiation in Siberia:

The Tungus say of their shamans: Before a man becomes a sha-
man he is sick for a long time. His understanding becomes con-
fused. The shamanistic ancestors of his clan come, hack him to
bits, tear him apart, cut his flesh in pieces, drink his blood. They
cut off his head and throw it in the oven, in which various iron
appurtenances of his costume are made red-hot and then forged.
This cutting up is carried out somewhere in the upper world by
the shaman ancestors. He alone receives the gift of shamanhood
who has shaman ancestors in his clan, who pass it on from genera-
tion to generation; and only when these have cut up his body and
examined his bones can he begin to shamanize. (p. 65)

We have noted that the function of shamanic initiation in the primitive
society is to effect the transformation of the shaman from a profane,
human condition to a superhuman, sacred one. But while the shaman
may carry out activities such as divining and prophesying, and occasion-
ally sorcery, these are not his major functions, and often fall within the
province of other types of practitioners. The shaman's primary functions
are those of healer and psychopomp. This is related to the specific nature
of the shamanic ecstasy; not all forms of mystical ecstasy are shamanic, for
this, like initiation, has its own peculiar nature. The shamanic ecstasy is
one in which the shaman is supposed to leave his physical body and jour-
ney to the Center of the World, which connects the earthly realm with the
celestial world above and the infernal regions below. This axis mundi may
be symbolized as a tree, mountain, tent pole, ladder, liana, or something
similar; the shaman is able to make the journey and return safely because
he is a master of ecstasy and possesses the guidance of helping spirits along
the way. His main functions thus become either guiding the soul of a de-
ceased person to its home in the infernal or celestial realms or journeying
to those realms for the purpose of retrieving the soul of a sick person

(which has wandered off by itself or been stolen by the spirits while the
patient was asleep), returning with it, and restoring it to the patient's
body. The shaman thus fulfills his functions by being able to travel in the
supernatural realm, and he is enabled to do this because he is a master of
ecstasy.

From the description of the shaman's duties in the community, we can
draw some obvious conclusions and make some further hermeneutical
speculations as to the shamanic function within the cultural context. The
curing function of shamanism, as well as such secondary functions as div-
ination and prophecy, show clearly that the shaman, like all magical prac-
titioners, helps a primitive culture to come to terms with environmental
forces that are both nurturing and threatening. Thus, through the sha-
manic propitiation of the spirits, good crops or fruitful hunting can be as-
sured; drought, epidemic, or other natural disasters can be averted. On
the deeper level of collective psychology, we can perceive several functions
of the shaman that would not be articulated by the members of a given
society, but that, nevertheless, are intrinsic to the shamanic function.
Lommel (1967) says of the social role of the shaman:

. . . primitive man is quite exceptionally susceptible to various
forms of mental disorder. Psychoses, neuroses, hallucinations,
mass hysteria and the like are of very frequent occurrence. The
shaman can cure these states—but only when he has overcome
them in himself. . . . the shaman is the center, the brain and the
soul of a (primitive) community. He is, so to speak, the regulator
of the soul of a group or tribe, and his function is to adjust, avert,
and heal defects, vacillations, disturbances of this soul. Looked at
biologically, the whole life of primitive people is more strongly
influenced by the subconscious than seems to be the case among
ourselves. It is clear that in this situation the position of the sha-
man is one of paramount importance. (p. 73)

The shaman is able to act as an intermediary between the society and
the supernatural, or to put it in Jungian terms, he is an intermediary to the
collective unconscious. Through the office of the shaman, the society at
large is brought into close and frequent encounter with the numinous ar-
chetypal symbols of the collective unconscious. These symbols retain their
numinosity, immediacy, and reality for the society through their constant
reaffirmation in shamanic ritual and through the shaman's epic narration of
mythical scenarios and his artistic production. The shaman does more,

however, than just recite the myths or express the religious symbolism in
making ritual artifacts; the shaman lives the myth. By virtue of his superhu-
man, transformed state, he enacts the role of the mythical hero: He can fly
through the air, talk to the gods, see everywhere, understand the animals,
and perform other feats characteristic of a semidivine entity. Thus, the sha-
man is the exemplar in the present epoch, which is regarded by primitives
as a profane, historical time, of the condition supposed to have been acces-
sible to all humans before the fall (cf. Eliade 19 61, chapter 2). In his ecstasy
the shaman reenters that mythical, paradisiacal condition that existed be-
fore the fall and thus reasserts, for the entire culture, the reality of that
mythical time. Thus, the validity of the archetypal motifs, which presum-
ably describe the human condition in the paradisiacal era, is reaffirmed.

The shamanic function also includes a psychoanalytic capability. That
the shaman can cure illnesses of a psychological or psychosomatic nature
is well established. The shaman is undoubtedly, perhaps essentially, a
doctor—but the factual medical knowledge of the primitives is very small;
the shaman's medical function seems to be confined to psychological, per-
haps psychoanalytical techniques, and his successes fall mainly within the
psychological domain (Lommel 1967, p. 25). By what exact mechanism
he is able to do this is not completely understood. It is as though the sha-
man, in his capacity of ecstatic psychopomp, practices a participation ther-
apy of the most sophisticated type; by means of his ecstatic capacity, the
shaman plunges into the collective unconscious and restores the patient's
self-identity (equivalent to finding his soul ) by taking onto himself the
unconscious contents that have inundated the patient through the princi-
ple of transference (cf. Jung 1954). Because this is accomplished in the con-
text of ritual, which is real and numinous to the participants, the shaman's
task is doubtless somewhat easier than that of a modern psychoanalyst
who is often faced with a demythologized, rationally hardened personality.

The shaman, then, acts as a doctor of the soul, both the individual and
the collective soul, and he is also a real and living exemplar of the primor-
dial, mythical human condition, and in being so maintains the reality and
immediacy of the sacred. He is able to carry out these functions because
he is master of the techniques of ecstasy, and it is by virtue of this that he
maintains his suprahuman state.

It is clear that the practice of shamanism, to a greater extent than other
religious offices, depends on the unique personality of the shaman. This
must account in part for the great diversity of preinitiatory traits that con-
stitute a shamanic election as well as the diversity in methods of shaman-
izing, in the means employed to produce ecstasy, and in the motifs of the

shaman's journey, not only in different cultures but between individuals as
well. With this in mind, let us lift the shaman out of his cultural context
for a moment and focus on the characteristics of his psychological makeup.

An item of the first order in addressing ourselves to this psychological
examination of the phenomenon is the question of the psychopathologi-
cal nature of the shamanic personality. There are, as we have noted, certain
cases where the symptoms leading to shamanic initiation can be traced to
a condition of mental illness, epilepsy, or catatonia; however, this is by no
means true for all such cases, as some have claimed. Initiation can also be
triggered by an encounter with a magical animal, the finding of a magical
stone or other object, or an ordeal in the wilderness.

Eliade (1967) masterfully points out where such theories have gone
astray:

The problem, in our view, has been wrongly stated. In the first
place, it is not correct to say that shamans are, or must always be,
neuropaths; on the contrary, a great many of them are perfectly
sound in mind. Moreover, those who had previously been ill have
become shamans just because they succeeded in getting well [italics
his]. Very often, when the vocation reveals itself in the course
of an illness or an attack of epilepsy, the initiation is also a cure.
The acquisition of the shamanic gifts indeed presupposes the reso-
lution of the psychic crisis brought on by the first signs of this
vocation. The initiation is manifested by—among other things—
a new psychic integration. (p. 77)

And, similarly, Nadel (1946) states:

And here it is important to stress that neither epilepsy nor insan-
ity, nor yet other minor mental derangements, are in themselves
regarded as symptoms of spirit possession. They are diseases,
abnormal disorders, not supernatural qualification. No shaman
is, in everyday life, an abnormal individual, a neurotic or a para-
noiac; if he were, he would be classed as a lunatic, not respected as
a priest. Nor finally can shamanism be correlated with incipient or
latent abnormality; I recorded no case of a shaman whose profes-
sional hysteria deteriorated into serious mental disorders. (p. 36)

From these comments, it is apparent that shamanism is not an institu-
tion designed to capitalize on psychological aberrations.

We shall return to the question of the stability of the shamanic person-
ality in the next chapter, where we will consider the similarities between
the self-cure of the shaman and the attempt to resolve a life-crisis that
characterizes essential schizophrenia.

Let us now consider the shamanic trance itself. All of the shaman's
functions, his ability to cure, divine, converse with the spirits, and travel
in the supernatural realm, depend on his ecstasy; were he unable to attain
ecstasy at will, he could not be a true shaman. Thus, the human will em-
ploy certain means for achieving ecstasy, which may be frenzied and pro-
longed drumming, dancing, and chanting, sleep deprivation, fasting, and
so on. These techniques are not dissimilar to the self-flagellation and as-
ceticism practiced by certain Christian mystics. In addition to these tech-
niques and often in conjunction with them, the shaman will employ
certain narcotic plants, such as the drinking of tobacco juice or the inhala-
tion of hashish smoke. While Eliade (1964, pp. 22of, 223, 4oo., 477) as-
serts that the use of narcotic substances as an aid to ecstasy invariably
indicates a decadence or vulgarization of the shamanic tradition, there is
reason to doubt this (cf. Wasson 1971, pp. 326-334). On the contrary, the
use of narcotic plants as an adjunct to shamanism is widespread and oc-
curs in every region of the globe where the plants occur. The important
role of the hallucinogenic mushroom Amanita muscaria in Siberian sha-
manism has been exhaustively documented by Wasson, and the incredibly
complete narcotic technology of New World Indians has been examined
by Schultes (Schultes and Hofmann 1973) at length. From this evidence it
appears that the narcotic experience and the shamanic experience are, in
very numerous cases, one and the same, though the narcotic experience
must be molded and directed by the symbolic motifs of ritual to give it its
peculiarly shamanic quality.

It is our contention, to be amplified in later chapters, that the presence
of psychoactive substances is a primary requirement for all true shamanism,
and that where such substances are not exogenously available as plants,
they must be endogenously available, either through metabolic predispo-
sition to their synthesis, as may occur in schizophrenia, or through the
various techniques of shamanism: dancing, drumming, singing, and the
confrontation of situations of stress and isolation. Where these alkaloids
are not present, shamanism becomes ritual alone, and its effectiveness suf-
fers accordingly. We hope to show that because of the biophysical roles
these compounds play at a molecular level, they are the operational and
physical keys allowing access to the powers claimed by the shaman.

One of the most interesting, and least understood, aspects of the sha-
manic personality centers upon the question of paranormal powers; the
shaman is supposed to be a master of fire and psychic heat, is thought to
be clairvoyant, clairaudiant, and telepathic. Further instances are given by
Eliade (1967):

From among the best-observed cases, let us recall those of clair-
voyance and thought-reading among the shamans of Tonga,
recorded by Shirokogorov; some strange cases of prophetic clair-
voyance in dreams among the Pygmies, as well as cases of the
discovery of thieves with the aid of a magic mirror; some very
concrete instances concerning the results of the chase, also aided
by a mirror; examples of the understanding, among these same
Pygmies, of unknown languages; cases of clairvoyance among
the Zulus; and lastly—attested by a number of authors, and by
documents that guarantee its authenticity—the collective cere-
mony of firewalking in Fiji. (p. 8yf.)

There is herein a fruitful and untapped subject for parapsychology. The
actual occurrence of such phenomena, in at least some instances, is beyond
question and suggests that the radical reorganization of the psychic facul-
ties, which shamanic initiation is supposed to produce, does have some va-
lidity beyond the merely symbolical; the shaman actually is superhuman in
some little-understood manner. Our later speculations will center on a
possible biophysical mechanism for this transformation. What is interest-
ing, and also supports the assertion that these phenomena are real, is their
essential similarity to paranormal powers encountered in other religious
traditions. Such motifs as magical flight, psychic heat, and immunity to
hot coals, for instance, are found in the yogic techniques of Buddhism and
Hinduism (Eliade 1967, pp. 89ff.). The ability to perform such magical
feats, in both the shamanic and the yogic traditions, simply reconfirms the
ontological mode associated with such practitioners; they have transcended
the human condition and now participate in the condition of the spirits.
Let us now focus our attention on a more speculative question: whether
there are, or could be, institutions in modern society that draw their mod-
els from shamanism. There appears to be occurring in modern life a pro-
gressive alienation from the numinous archetypal contents of the collective
unconscious, which has engendered a gradually encroaching sense of col-
lective despair and anxiety. The archetypal motifs of the Western religious

tradition seem to have lost their effectiveness for the larger portion of civi-
lized humanity or, at best, have been depotentiated to the level of a merely
psychological reality. Western humans have lost their sense of unity with
the cosmos and with the transcendent mystery within themselves. Modern
science has given us a picture of human beings as accidental products of
random evolutionary processes in a universe that is itself without purpose
or meaning. This alienation of modern humans from the numinous ground
of their beings has engendered the existentialist ethic and the contempo-
rary preoccupation with the immediate historical situation. Humans are
regarded as leading a wholly profane existence within a wholly profane
time, that is, within history; the reality of the sacred is denied or reduced
to the level of psychology.

In non-Western cultures, in primitive cultures particularly, humans
are not conscious of living in historical time, but regard themselves as
inhabiting a numinous sacral time (cf. Eliade 1959). If these humans are
conscious of history at all, it is of a mythical, paradigmatic history, a para-
disiacal epoch that lies beyond the attritional influence of profane time.
From the point of view of religious symbolism, this preoccupation of mod-
ern humanity with its historical and existential situation springs from an
unconscious sense of its impending end.

It is in this unenviable position, then, that we find the modern temper:
anguished by the imminence of death, yet trapped in profane, historical
time and thus able to regard death only as nothingness; the saving pres-
ence of a sacred, transcendent mode of being is absent from the contem-
porary worldview. Thus modern humans stand today at the very edge of
the abyss of death and nothingness, and it is precisely here that one can
perceive a useful role for a modern shamanism. Again there is a need for a
doctor of the soul, a figure who can bring humankind into close and fruit-
ful confrontation with the collective unconscious, the creative matrix of
all that we are and have ever been.

Naturally, the modern shaman will have to search for means of fulfill-
ing his psychopompic functions, which are different from the relatively
straightforward ritualistic techniques of his predecessor. One of the most
potentially effective of such means lies in his artistic and poetic capacities;
the soul of modern humanity is still open to influence by aesthetic means.
Hence one of the first places we should look for signs of a modern sha-
manism is in the artistic sphere. The shamanic role of the artist in modern
cultures extends not only to his work, but to his very life. Through ma-
nipulation of his physical medium, the artist seeks to express his personal

vision of reality—a vision arising from the roots of the unconscious and
not dependent upon public consensus, in fact, often actively opposed to
it. More than that, the artist exemplifies in his life a freedom that is simi-
lar to the superhuman freedom of the shaman.

Although it is not too difficult to recognize the role of the artist in the
modern world as being in some sense shamanic, it is perhaps more diffi-
cult to understand our second nomination for a contemporary counter-
part to the shamanic practitioner, the scientific researcher. Eliade (1967)
has pointed out that scientists are the creators and keepers of a new myth-
ology of matter. Indeed, the scientist who charts the unexplored levels of
organization to be found in nature, from the bizarre, paradoxical realms of
quantum physics to the staggering vastness of the metagalaxy, has much in
common with the shaman who journeys through the magical topography
of the spirit-world.

One area of modern life that does not appear to be shamanic, but that
might profitably model itself after shamanism, is psychoanalysis. A mod-
ern soul doctor might well achieve better results if he or she could model
therapy after a psychopompic journey through the collective unconscious.
The exact techniques would, of course, have to be adapted to modern pa-
tients, but where the unconscious is concerned, all people are primitive.
One approach to such a shamanic psychoanalysis could be through the
controlled and judicious use of psychotropic drugs; knowledge of both the
promises and dangers of such agents has increased tremendously in recent
years, as has understanding of the role they play in shamanism. A combi-
nation of knowledge and wisdom in applying their properties could very
well give an effective and harmless technique of ecstasy that could be
usefully employed in psychoanalysis (cf. Naranjo 1973).

With this we conclude our preliminary discussion of shamanism. The
background that we have laid down, our discussion of the shaman's tradi-
tional role in archaic societies, our examination of his singular personality,
abilities, and techniques have been skeletal at best. Our speculation on
shamanism and modern society is likewise incomplete and intentionally
so; we sought only to make the point that the numinous motifs of sha-
manism can have a relevance to modern humans, and doubtless there are
instances of this that have not been mentioned. If we are to draw a conclu-
sion as to how we can profit from the study of shamanism, it is this: Per-
haps, through understanding the fascinating and alien figure of the
shaman, we can draw somewhat nearer to that numinous, archetypal, liv-
ing mystery that dwells within each of us.

Chapter 2

Shamans and Schizophrenia

The question of just how much of the human experience of the supernat-
ural stems from mental aberrance or experiences during trance or intoxi-
cation has intrigued anthropologists and psychologists for a number of
years. In the preceding chapter we discussed the characteristics of shaman-
ism, one of the most archaic of religious technologies. We now want to
show that significant similarities exist between shamanic election and ini-
tiation and the effort at psychic reorganization that characterizes some
forms of schizophrenia. If, as we proposed earlier, the mind and its buried
unconscious contents have their origin at some submolecular interface,
then it is reasonable to suggest that a similar biophysical release mecha-
nism is responsible for the irruption of these contents in both shamanism
and schizophrenia. Comparison of the two syndromes could be useful for
what it might reveal, not only about the processes that trigger access to
such unconscious material but also about the means of controlling these
processes. Whereas schizophrenia may or may not result in eventual con-
trol of the nonordinary experience and psychic reintegration, in shaman-
ism this step is, nevertheless, a sine qua non.

The primary difficulty in formulating any definition of mental aber-
rance in general and schizophrenia in particular is that any such definition
will necessarily reflect the cultural bias out of which it is formed. Behavior
considered abnormal or pathological in one culture may be quite congru-
ent with the norms of another. Belief in witchcraft might be indicative of
paranoid delusion in one culture but might represent a prevailing view in
another.

For our purposes, abnormal behavior can be defined as behavior differ-
ing from the accepted cultural standard as a result of an inner conflict or
crisis in the life of the individual, regardless of the standard of normative
behavior in the society in which the life-crisis occurs. One of the basic dis-
tinctions between normal and abnormal behavior lies not in the outward
manifestations of the conflict, but in differing cultural attitudes toward
the life-crisis and its resolution.

The term schizophrenia is used to denote a number of heterogeneous,
but related, disorders usually characterized by withdrawal from the envi-
ronment and preoccupation with interior processes, attended by a resul-
tant disintegration of the personality. An early term for schizophrenia was
Dementia Praecox, meaning an intense pathological state beginning early in

life. In 1896 the psychologist Kraepelin classified schizophrenia into three
subtypes and ascribed organic, endogenous causes to each type. Later, a
fourth type, known as simple schizophrenia, was added to this classifica-
tion and its cause adduced to be a crisis in an individual's life situation.

Boisen (1936) lists the following subtypes of schizophrenia (in Boisen's
terms, dementia praecox), first noting that . . . findings have indicated
that it is important to distinguish dementia praecox as a way of life from
dementia praecox as an attempt at reorganization [italics his] (p. 314): (1)
Simple schizophrenia, represented by the individual who drifts off into a
world of fantasy and easy pleasure-taking without putting up any resis-
tance. This type of schizophrenia is classed as denoting a way of life. (2)
Paranoic schizophrenia, characterized by an individual's inability to admit
defeat or error and a resulting distortion of beliefs to save the conception
of the individual's relation to the external world on which his psychic
structure is based. This type also represents a way of life. (3) Catatonic
schizophrenia represents a desperate attempt at reorganization following
upon an awareness of danger. Catatonic disturbances often take on the
form of stupor or excitement and may be looked on as more severe forms
of the anxiety neurosis. They bear a close relationship to certain types of
religious conversion experiences. (4) Hebephrenic schizophrenia repre-
sents the terminal stage of the drifting reaction or demoralization that
may follow upon an unsuccessful attempt at reorganization. Speech tends
to lose logical sequence, and the individual becomes silly, uninhibited,
and indecent and tends to have bizarre ideas.

Silverman (1967) lists as clinical symptoms of schizophrenia: (1) an
unmistakable change in personality, (2) autism—nonreality-oriented idea-
tion, (3) disturbances of perception, (4) disturbances of thinking, (5) pro-
found emotional upheavals, and (6) bizarre forms of behavior. He makes
four classifications of significance for our study under the general heading
of schizophrenia,, based on Sullivan's classification (Silverman 1967). The
first is process schizophrenia, in which the personality is poorly inte-
grated; there is continuous and prolonged development of schizophrenic
symptoms, and prognosis is poor. It is ... the congeries of signs and
symptoms pertaining to an organic, degenerative disease usually of insidi-
ous development (Sullivan 1953). Reactive schizophrenia, on the other
hand, ... is primarily a disorder of living . . . the person concerned be-
comes schizophrenic—as one episode in his career among others—for sit-
uational reasons and more or less abruptly (Sullivan 1953). Under the
reactive schizophrenic category, Silverman differentiates between essen-
tial schizophrenia, in which . . . the profoundest of emotional upheavals

and . . . religious and magical ideation unfold under conditions of marked
environmental detachment, and paranoid schizophrenia, in which
... the patient, caught up in the spread of meaning, magic, and tran-
scendental forces, suddenly 'understands' it all as the work of some other
concrete person or persons . . . attention is thereafter focused primarily
upon environmental events and people. Silverman goes on to say of es-
sential types that they ... evidence an overtly indifferent orientation to
unfamiliar stimuli, a reduced attentiveness to the environment, and a
tendency to attenuate the experienced intensity of environmental stimula-
tion, whereas he characterizes the paranoid type as one who is overtly
responsive to unfamiliar stimulation, extensively scans the environ-
ment . . . and evidences a tendency to augment the experienced intensity
of environmental input (Silverman 1967, pp. 22-23).

Both the shamanic initiation and the inwardly directed essential form
of schizophrenia reflect an attempt at psychic reorganization as a means of
resolving an inner conflict or crisis in the life of the individual. The non-
paranoid type of schizophrenia bears the most favorable prognosis for an
eventual working through of the inner conflict, resulting in a reintegrated,
healed personality:

It is as if the paranoid schizophrenic, unable to comprehend or
tolerate the stark terrors of his inner world, prematurely redirects
his attention to the outside world. In this type of abortive crisis
solution, the inner chaos is not, so to speak, worked through or is
not capable of being worked through. Since the working through
of the inner-world experience turns out to be a primary concern
. . . (both for the shaman and for the schizophrenic), the para-
noid schizophrenic resolution is considered to be an incomplete
one, and the essential, nonparanoid schizophrenic form is there-
fore regarded as more comparable to that of the shaman, the
healed madman. (Silverman 1967)

The onset of essential schizophrenia usually begins with the magnifica-
tion of some unresolved conflict in the individual's life, perhaps a poor sex-
ual adjustment or deficiencies in social relationships, which is apt to give
rise to intense feelings of impotence, failure, or personal incompetence to
the extent that self-concern may so overwhelm the personality that the
schizophrenic becomes aware of little else. The schizophrenic syndrome
may end at this point if the individual is successful in attaining some sort
of personality reorganization and resolution of the precipitating conflict.

The patient may then return to normal, sometimes improved but often
with a seriously damaged self-esteem.

More often, however, the sense of estrangement and isolation is fol-
lowed by an ever more marked narrowing of attention to the external envi-
ronment, increased absorption in interior fantasy, and withdrawal from the
outside world. Sustained constriction of the field of attention under these
conditions also results in a state of self-initiated sensory deprivation, with
consequent inevitable difficulty in the differentiation of fantasy and non-
fantasy, between hallucination and perception (Silverman 1967, p. 24). In
this and later stages, auditory and tactile hallucinations may manifest
themselves; the patient often hears voices or engages in conversation with
imaginary companions and also may experience distortions of body-image,
the sensation of dying or of the body being cut up, disintegrating, or melt-
ing. Often the patient falls under the compulsion to obey the imperative of
the voices and may engage in irrational, sometimes symbolic and ritualis-
tic, actions or gestures (Boisen 1942). This stage is tantamount to the stage
that Silverman terms fusing of higher and lower referential process, in
which

the already unstable and weakened psychological self is disorga-
nized by this drastically altered environment and is inundated by
lower order referential processes such as occur in dreams or revery.
Owing to the depths of the emotional stirring that triggered the
whole process, the world comes to be experienced as filled with
supernatural forces and profound but unimaginable meaning.
(Silverman 1967, p. 24)

In Boisen's (1942) words:

It is known as the inspiration or the automatism, and may
be defined as the idea or thought process which after a period
of incubation darts suddenly into consciousness . . . they seem
to him entirely different from anything he had ever thought or
dreamed before. He assumes therefore that they must come from
a superhuman source. (p. 25)

The fifth stage—what Silverman calls the cognitive reorganization —
occurs when the schizophrenic succeeds in reintegrating his personality

and assimilating the new unconscious contents to which he has gained ac-
cess. This stage constitutes the main difference between essential and
paranoid schizophrenia, in that it is conspicuously lacking in the latter. It
may be said to represent a cure, not in the sense that the schizophrenic
henceforth returns to normal and is no longer bothered by autonomous
unconscious contents, but rather in that he manages to integrate these
contents into the sphere of consciousness and learns to cope with the ex-
panded reality in which he now must live. This stage may develop to any
point, from a very marginal adjustment accompanied by constant relapses
to an extremely pronounced state of mental acuity in which awareness,
sensitivity, and creative capacity are likely to be many times greater than
in normal individuals, as if entire areas of the brain, previously inaccessi-
ble, had been opened up by the transforming experience. The schizo-
phrenic who has managed successfully to complete this final adjustment is
in every sense superior, for he is truly a healed madman, one who not
only has crossed over to the other side but has returned and hence pos-
sesses access to both spheres of reality.

Up to this point we have examined the phenomenon of schizophrenia
in its successive stages, from its onset to its resolution. We must now
search for correlations between this most severe of mental aberrances and
the motifs encountered in shamanism, the revered and respected archaic
techniques of ecstasy that occupy a central position in the religious life of
tribal peoples.

The criteria that define the vocation of shaman are many and varied
throughout the world, and it is certainly untrue that every shaman must
be a schizoid personality. We have observed that the shaman is usually
considered a healed one and that he gains shamanic status because he
has healed himself; but the crisis for which he works out a resolution is
not always a mental disorder and, in some cases where it is, it is not always
a schizophrenic type of aberrance. The shaman's call or election may
arise from a purely physical malady, the spirits making their desire that he
become a shaman known to him during a feverish delirium. Still other
forms of shamanic election may arise from an accident in the external
world, such as being struck by lightning or being bitten by a snake. In in-
stances where mental aberrance is a factor in shamanic vocation, a predis-
position to epileptic or cataleptic seizures, to hysteria or anxiety, may be
the underlying cause rather than schizophrenia. But whatever the under-
lying cause of the shaman's election, it is important to constantly keep in

mind that it is the ability to cure that is the real basis of the shamanic
status:

. . . we must also consider the fact that the shamanic initiation
proper includes not only an ecstatic experience but... a course of
theoretical and practical instruction. . . . Whether they still are or
are not subject to real attacks of epilepsy or hysteria, shamans, sor-
cerers, and medicine men in general cannot be regarded as merely
sick; their psychopathic experience has a theoretical content, for
if they have cured themselves and are able to cure others, it is,
among other things, because they know the mechanism, or rather,
the theory of illness. (Eliade 1964, p. 32)

In a significant number of cases, however, it is possible to discover im-
portant similarities between certain elements of shamanic initiation and
the motifs associated with progressive schizophrenic disintegration. Now
let's return once again to the stages of essential schizophrenic onset, this
time to uncover similarities between these stages and those associated with
the shamanic election and initiation.

The onset of schizophrenia usually arises at the time of some basic life-
crisis, when the individual is likely to experience feelings of guilt, im-
potence, or incompetence in a life situation culturally acknowledged as
crucial. We find that this is also true in many cases of shamanism; in addi-
tion to being introverted and of a nervous constitution since childhood,
the future shaman often receives his vocational call through accident, sick-
ness, familial misfortune, or similar mishap. Thus, we may infer that in
cultures where the shamanic institution exists, an individual may choose
to restructure his life and become a shaman as a means of resolving a life-
crisis.

The second stage of schizophrenic withdrawal is manifested by a sense
of isolation and estrangement from ordinary cultural concerns, which
may be followed or accompanied by a pathological fixation on certain
ideas, events, or objects purportedly imbued with some sort of supernat-
ural significance. This is also found in shamanism; initiatory seclusion of
the shamanic candidate is common among many tribes, and this is sym-
bolic of the shaman's psychic isolation, for ... the medicine man stands
apart from the world of the profane precisely because he has more direct
relations with the sacred and manipulates its manifestations more effec-
tively (Eliade 1964, p. 31). In this and later stages, the schizophrenic or
shaman may develop a fixed ideation on a narrow circle of significant

ideas, omens, or objects, often becoming so intense as to result in sleep
loss or autohypnosis. The boundaries between sleeping and waking break
down, and the novice shaman lives in a twilight world of hypnagogic fan-
tasy and half-waking reverie.

The principle behind the induction of autohypnosis is one of per-
ceptual fixation, and some of its behavioral manifestations are
present in the pathological staring of schizophrenics or novice
shamans or in the total attentiveness of certain shamans to their
frenzied, prolonged drum-beating or whistling. (Silverman 1967,
p. 26)

This acute constriction of the field of attention brings about a state of
self-initiated sensory deprivation. Experiments with sensory deprivation
at McGill University (Nordland, in Edsman 1967, pp. 170ff.) have shown
that in this state, visual and auditory hallucinations and perceptual distor-
tions are common, with subjects often hearing voices, seeing imaginary
people, and having sensations of body-image distortion. All of these man-
ifestations can be found to a marked degree in shamanism. The shaman is
said to make a journey, during which he is spoken to by the spirits, who
give him curing instructions and make their wishes known for certain
kinds of propitiatory sacrifices; they may also appear to him in the form of
visions or apparitions. Motifs of death and rebirth, often involving bodily
dismemberment and reassimilation, are common in shamanism, as Eliade
(1964) illustrates:

. . . both spontaneous vocation and the quest for initiation involve
... a more or less symbolical ritual of mystical death, sometimes
suggested by a dismemberment of the body and renewal of the
organs . . . equivalent to re-entering the womb of this primordial
life, that is, to a complete renewal, to a mystical rebirth. (pp. 53,
63ff.)

In both schizophrenia and shamanism, this is followed by a fusion of
lower referential processes with higher, so that the mind is inundated by a
flood of archaic imagery that seems to come from outside sources; in sha-
manism, this stage is typical of the fully manifested trance.

The fact that they are entirely different from anything previously
experienced lends support to the assumption that they have come

from the realm of the supernatural. One feels oneself to be
dwelling among the mysterious and the uncanny. Ideas of world
catastrophe, of cosmic importance, and of mission abound.
Words, thoughts, and dreams can easily be seen to reside in exter-
nal objects. Causal relationships are perceived against a back-
ground of magic and animism. (Silverman 1967, p. 28)

The difference between the shaman and the schizophrenic must be
sought in the degree of cultural acceptance of this lower-order referential
content. The altered perception of reality into which this newly opened
region of cognition plunges the schizophrenic has, in modern societies, no
cultural validity.

The last stage in the progression, that of cognitive reorganization to
cope with the altered perception in which the individual now lives, is for
the shaman and for the schizophrenic much the same thing—the arduous
task of learning to use the altered perception to good advantage, for cre-
ative endeavor and increased sensitivity. An important difference, how-
ever, is that in our culture the schizophrenic is forced to work out his
adjustment without the benefit of culturally sanctioned attitudes of accep-
tance for the expanded reality that he now inhabits, whereas in primitive
society not only is the shaman in possession of an elaborate body of tradi-
tional teachings regarding his illness, but his adjustment is made much
easier by virtue of his accepted and respected social position.

The shaman must indeed be possessed of a superior flexibility and con-
stitution, for not only must he attend to the needs of his patients in this
world but he must also satisfy his spirits in the other. He is the technician
of the numinous par excellence, and his vocation is a demanding one,
consisting as it does of maintaining a constant equilibrium between ordi-
nary reality and the supernatural realm. The shaman's psychic life is not
unlike the unnaturally dexterous dances he performs at the height of his
ecstasy; it is a constant balancing act, as though he were a psychic tight-
rope walker on the razor's edge between the external world and the bi-
zarre, magical, often terrifying world within.

However, one of the major differences between shamans and schizo-
phrenics appears to lie in the cultural attitudes with which they are re-
garded, and this disparity is perhaps deserving of some comment.
Lommel (1967) says of shamanism as a possible cure technique:

The way out of the situation lies in shamanizing; that is to say, the
mental sickness can be healed only if the sufferer accepts the often

unwanted and feared office of shaman, which the spirits are forc-
ing upon him. We gain the impression that early man has found
an almost unfailing way of curing mental disease, that a certain
psychic constitution makes escape from a pathological state pos-
sible. (p. 53)

The suggestion that we wish to infer from Lommel's observation is that
perhaps, in literate cultures, the schizophrenic is the victim of a culturally
misdirected attitude. It seems reasonable to suggest that in our culture the
schizophrenic provides a necessary pipeline to the collective unconscious,
just as the shaman does in tribal societies. The spiritual atrophying of
contemporary culture may be due in large measure to its loss of sensitivity
to processes in the collective unconscious. A reinstitution of the shamanic
role in modern society might prevent its total estrangement from the col-
lective unconscious, which remains the fountainhead of all human cul-
tures, archaic or modern.

CHAPTER 3 - Organismic Thought

The progress of science is, like all other creative activities of human intel-
ligence, a groping toward pattern—toward the accumulation of assigned
pattern for the coordination of observed details and toward the uncover-
ing of novel pattern and the consequent introduction of novel details.
This tendency toward synthesis, toward the apprehension of ever more
complex and inclusive orders of pattern, appears to be a fundamental
quality of human thought. It is characteristic of aesthetics, philosophy,
and religion, as well as of science. Understanding consists of the assimila-
tion of patterns encountered in the external world, and insofar as under-
standing progresses, it is the assimilation of novel forms of pattern and the
modification of previously perceived patterns that such novel patterns in-
troduce. One of the chief resistances to this progressive penetration of un-
derstanding is the dogmatic tendency to adhere to orthodox modes of
assigned pattern when confronted with novel details that call for a re-
ordering of understanding. In the case of science, one can point to the
persistence, in our conceptual models, of the Newtonian doctrine of con-
crete material entities possessing the properties of simple location; where-
as the order of pattern revealed by quantum physics allows for neither
concrete endurance nor simple location at its most basic levels. On the
opposite end of the scale, one can point to the doctrine of relativity, which
has shown that space and time must be regarded as properties of each
other, yet one generally continues to characterize space in terms of the re-
lationships of Euclidean geometry on any scale short of the cosmic. Still
another example can be cited in the scientific assumption of the suffi-
ciency of purely physicochemical properties to explain the fact of living
organisms and, by extension, the fact of mind.

To carry on its empirical investigations, science must embark on this
methodological license of abstracting certain sets of facts from the totality
of patterned relationships of which those facts are a part. As long as these
assumptions are understood for what they are, as a set of ad hoc hypothe-
ses employed for the purpose of characterizing a given phenomenon, that
is, purely for the sake of methodological convenience, then science en-
counters no difficulty. It is when science proclaims the adequacy of a
given order of pattern to characterize all levels of organization that it runs
into philosophical difficulties, for then it extends the methodological ab-
stractions used to characterize a phenomenon to sets of phenomena that

may in actuality exhibit patterns of a quite different order. It is to the
philosophical consequences of this methodological inconsistency of sci-
ence that this chapter is addressed. We intend to examine in some detail
the philosophical problems raised by scientific methodology; we will at-
tempt finally to tentatively suggest the fundamentals of a metaphysics that
is consistent not only with the pursuit of scientific abstraction but also
with the apprehension of the world as it impinges on us as living, sensing,
minded organisms.

Alfred North Whitehead, in Science and the Modern World (1967, p. 7),
states: Every philosophy is tinged with the coloring of some secret imagi-
native background, which never emerges explicitly into its chains of rea-
soning. For science this intuitive speculation consists in its assumption of
the knowability of the world, in its belief that every event can be corre-
lated with its antecedents in a definite manner exemplifying general prin-
ciples. This assumption, that in nature there is a secret, and that that
secret can be unveiled, forms the unconscious metaphysical assumption
behind all research. This scientific faith was not the creation of science it-
self but was inherited from the insistence of Greek and Scholastic philoso-
phy on the rational order of nature, on the belief that nature conducts
itself according to inexorable, orderly laws. This view in Greek cosmology
is found in the conception that all things in nature tend toward a definite
and proper end; while in Scholastic philosophy, it is reflected in the in-
stinctive tone of faith centered upon the rationality and scrutability of
God. Every detail of nature was conceived as supervised and ordered; the
search into nature could only vindicate the faith of centuries. Though the
tacit philosophical creed of science is embodied in these antecedent ratio-
nal traditions, the way was paved for the rise of science itself by a turn
away from theoretical contemplation toward an interest in nature for its
own sake, the observation of concrete, irreducible facts. In this aspect,
modern science arose out of a reaction against the abstract rationalism of
Scholasticism. What could not be demonstrated, what was not apparent
to observation, was inadmissible as evidence in the scientific worldview.
And yet the belief that the diversity of irreducible and stubborn facts was
harmonizable into an intelligible, rational order arose not as a result of
empirical observation, but out of faith in the order of nature.

In the light of these mixed origins of modern science—its instinctive
belief in the rationality of nature, coupled with its insistence on the obser-
vation of irreducible facts—it is interesting to consider the role of induc-
tion in science. When one observes, one also selects; a pure observation

deals only with a particular set of conditions giving rise to a particular
phenomenon. When one extrapolates the particular observation to the
whole set of phenomena exemplifying similar conditions, this is induc-
tion. An entire class of phenomena has been characterized on the basis of
a limited sampling of such phenomena. By this process of induction, sci-
ence thus arrives at a formulation of general conditions that characterize
not only the particular entity or occasion under investigation but also any
other real or theorized occasion or entity that satisfies the postulated gen-
eral conditions. This process of framing abstract postulates that bear a ref-
erence to no particular occasion or entity (and, in consequence, enters into
the description of all such occasions) reaches its height in mathematics.
The characterization of number, for example, five, does not depend on
whether you are referring to five apples or five minutes; it can be impar-
tially applied to either, regardless of the intrinsic differences of apples and
minutes. Pure mathematics exists in the realm of pure abstraction; all it
asserts is that reason insists that if any entities whatsoever have any rela-
tions that satisfy such-and-such purely abstract conditions, then they must
have other relations that satisfy other purely abstract conditions.

To the extent that science seeks to explain the mechanism of physical
phenomena with mathematically expressible laws, it reduces the data of
concrete observation in particular events to the status of pure abstrac-
tions. The abstractions existed antecedently to the physical phenomena
they were found to describe. The complex of ideas surrounding the peri-
odic functions had to be worked out, as pure mathematical theory, before
their relations to such physical phenomena as the motion of a pendulum,
the movements of the planets, and the physical properties of a vibrating
string could be discerned. The point is that as mathematics became more
abstract, it acquired an ever-increasing practical application to diverse
concrete phenomena. Thus, abstraction, characterized by numerical oper-
ations, became the dominant conceptual mode used to describe concrete
facts.

In the process of induction, one extrapolates given characteristics of a
particular past; one does not extrapolate general laws except on the basis
of an assumed rationality of nature. The introduction of mathematics
into the scheme supplies the nature of the data to be searched for in obser-
vation, namely, measurable quantities. In physics, this emphasis on mea-
surable elements reached its satisfaction in the Newtonian concepts of
mass and force. Mass was conceived as a constant property inherent in all
material bodies in measurable amounts, whether that body was at rest or

in motion, and that remained inherent in the body from one moment to
the next, for as long as the body endured. Force was defined as mass times
acceleration, and hence refers primarily to bodies in motion. It is impor-
tant for our purposes to note that there is in these laws the tacit assump-
tion of the self-identity of a material body in both space and time; a body
is the same body whether it is at point A or point B or any point between
them. Similarly, the body remains fully itself in its transitions through
time and at any instant, however short, of time. The material is said to
have the property of simple location; that is, it can be said to be definitely
here in space and here in time, without reference to any other region of
space or time. But this notion raises difficulties for induction, for if in the
location of configurations of matter through a stretch of time there is no
inherent reference to any other times, past or future, it immediately fol-
lows that nature at any period does not refer to nature at any other period.
Accordingly, induction is not based on anything that is inherent in nature.
The order of nature cannot be justified by the mere observation of nature,
for there is nothing in the present fact that inherently refers to either the
past or the future.

This doctrine of simple location has a further consequence for science
in that it explains physical phenomena in terms of the interaction of ma-
terial entities in space. To the scientific mind of the seventeenth century,
physical phenomena, including the phenomenon of a living organism,
were understood as a manifestation of the interaction of material entities;
the world consisted of physical bodies having mass, location, and locomo-
tion, such entities having these properties as essential qualities. But other
qualities exist, which normally enter into observations of a phenomenon,
but which are suppressed by the purely physical description that admits
only of mass, location, and motion. We refer to such secondary qualities
as color, or roundness, or scent, or texture. These qualities were not con-
sidered inherent in the entities themselves, but as arising out of our appre-
hension of phenomena and having no existence apart from apprehension.
Such qualities were in fact considered to be products of the mind alone:

. . . But the mind in apprehending also experiences sensations
which, properly speaking, are qualities of the mind alone. These
sensations are projected by the mind so as to clothe appropriate
bodies in external nature. Thus the bodies are perceived as
with qualities which in reality do not belong to them, qualities
which in fact are purely the offspring of the mind. Thus nature

gets credit which should in truth be reserved for ourselves: the
rose for its scent: the nightingale for his song: the sun for his
radiance. The poets are entirely mistaken. They should address
their lyrics to themselves, and should turn them into odes of
self-congratulation on the excellency of the human mind. Nature
is a dull affair, soundless, scentless, colourless; merely the hurrying
of material, endlessly, meaninglessly.

However you disguise it, this is the practical outcome of the
characteristic scientific philosophy which closed the seventeenth
century. (Whitehead 1967, p. 54)

This abstraction of the secondary qualities from the primary ones of
physical bodies had the unfortunate effect of creating a dualism between
mind and nature. Nature became identified with matter and its move-
ment, whereas mind, believing, suffering, perceiving, but not interfering,
was conceived as existing apart from the external nature that it observed,
described, and measured. Yet to the extent that mind is in nature, it is a
product of nature. Mind is a quality proceeding from living organisms,
and organisms are regarded by mechanist science as arising from the blind
interactions of undirected matter; both life and mind become in this view
simply the outcome of the random interactions of matter over a vast scale
of time. Any apparent meaning to this process, any type of evolutionary
advancement or value or purpose, is simply a projection of the observer;
in itself, nature is intrinsically blind, without purpose, meaning, or value.
This was the philosophical paradox that modern science, based on induc-
tive abstraction, led itself into: confronted with a universe both lifeless
and devoid of mind, how to explain the apparent intelligibility of nature
and the fact of living organisms.

The preceding discussion has tried to point out that in science certain
axiomatic, a priori assumptions accompany any exercise of scientific
methodologies. Though we have by no means exhausted the list of such
assumptions, we have hopefully pointed to some of the major ones: the
implicit faith in the knowability and the rationality of nature, a legacy to
science of Greek metaphysics and medieval Scholasticism; the utilization
by science of the inductive method, and the twofold assumption of this
use—that observation of representative concrete phenomena can lead to
the formulation of abstract, general laws, and the assumption of the rele-
vance of past events to present and future events; the assumption of the
sufficiency of interactions of material entities having simple location in

giving rise to nature, and proceeding from this assumption, the exclusion
of mind as a causative factor in the universe, and the consequent exclu-
sion of value and teleology from nature. That science makes these as-
sumptions in the exercise of its methodology is not our criticism; they are
necessary for the pragmatic practice of science. In the absence of such
self-imposed limitation, the practice of science would be impossible. Our
criticism is that these assumptions are not made explicitly, with the un-
derstanding that, of course, they are philosophically arguable; they are
made merely in the service of methodological convenience. Instead, in
the greater number of cases, no attempt at philosophical justification is
made; the tacit assumptions of science are left unstated, to be inferred by
the philosopher. Because the methods of science work, because they can
produce results, science feels no need to concern itself with philosophy.

The progress of science in recent years, that is, primarily since the turn
of the century, has unlocked vast new areas to human understanding. It
has revealed novel orders of pattern in nature that not only went unde-
tected and unsuspected by the science of an earlier day but also have ne-
cessitated almost the complete restructuring of the scientific worldview.
We have in mind such discoveries as relativity, with its non-Euclidean
topology, and quantum theory, with its notion of the discontinuous na-
ture of matter and energy. Yet, in the face of these novel orders of pattern,
whose explication was spearheaded by scientific methodology itself, other
areas of science, not concerned directly with investigating such areas, have
continued to carry the burden of outmoded, false conceptions as intrinsic
components of their epistemological equipment.

In the following section of this chapter, let us focus attention on one
area of classical scientific assumption, the notion of materialism, and see
in what ways this notion finds itself in need of revision in the light of
modern quantum theory. Then let us apply our revised concepts to those
two stumbling blocks of classical materialism, organism and mind, to see
if we have come any distance toward framing a set of epistemological
principles that are both supportive of scientific investigation and truer to
our everyday apprehension of the world.

One approach to the quantum theory can be found in the assumption
that an electron does not continuously traverse its path in space, but in-
stead appears at discrete positions in space for successive durations of time:

It is as though an automobile, moving at the average rate of thirty
miles an hour along a road, did not traverse the road continuously;

but appeared successively at the successive milestones, remaining
for two minutes at each milestone . . .

But now a problem is handed over to the philosophers. This
discontinuous existence in space, thus assigned to electrons, is
very unlike the continuous existence of material entities which we
habitually assume as obvious. The electron seems to be borrowing
the character which some people have assigned to the Mahatmas
of Tibet. These electrons, with the correlative protons, are now
conceived as being the fundamental entities out of which the
material bodies of ordinary experience are composed. Accordingly,
if this explanation is allowed, we have to revise all our notions of
the ultimate character of material existence. For when we pene-
trate to these final entities, this startling discontinuity of spatial
existence discloses itself. (Whitehead 1967, pp. 34—35)

The problem can be overcome if we accord to matter the same vibra-
tory character that we apply to light and sound. The adoption of this vi-
bratory picture of matter is going to necessitate the drastic revision of our
ideas of simple location. One recalls that a unit of matter having simple
location does not require a given period of time in which to manifest its
essential identity—it is fully itself even if the period of its endurance is
subdivided indefinitely. Similarly, subdividing the space of the material
entity does divide the volume, but its elements are conceived to retain
their essential spatial continuity. Note that in this view the passage of
time is conceived of as accidental, rather than essential; that is, the pas-
sage of time has nothing to do with the character of the material. If we
adopt the vibratory description of matter urged by quantum theory, time
becomes of the essence of the material. In an analogous way, as a note of
music is nothing at any instant, but requires its whole period in which to
manifest itself, so the vibratory entity of a primordial unit of matter re-
quires a definite period of time, however small, for the expression of its
essential nature. Another consequence arises as well: Quantum theory
tells us that the electron, the basic unit of matter, does not have continu-
ous spatial existence, but discrete points of manifestation (quanta) in
space. Now, at first sight, this view seems much less in congruence with
our everyday experience than the old classical notion of simple location in
space. After all, we perceive all around us objects that seem to have conti-
nuity both in space and in time; are we then to believe that such appar-
ently solid entities are actually vibratory processes? That such a view is

actually more true to experience, in that it opens the way to explain those
other commonsense elements of experience, organisms and minds, we
will try to show next. However, one feature of the quantum view can be
immediately pointed out; that is, that matter ceases to have simple loca-
tion, mass, and locomotion as primary qualities; these become as refer-
ent to the synthesis of a perceiver as such secondary qualities as color,
texture, or noisiness. Thus, either matter no more has primary qualities
than it does secondary qualities and is in itself without quality, or the sec-
ondary qualities are just as real as the primary ones and are there to be

perceived by the mind.

Thus, in the quantum view, the notion of material entities having form,
a discrete and fixed spatial configuration, and endurance, a continuous sus-
tenance through time, yields to the notion of process, a dynamical act of
continuously evolving becoming. Material entities assume the character
of an event; apart from process, there is no being. A thing is what it is by
virtue of the serial unfolding of pattern through time; if one attempts to
isolate an object at a single, nontemporal instant, apart from the instants
preceding and following it, the object loses its essential identity. The object
requires a self-defined, indivisible epoch for its realization; its reality is
defined by the unity of the various processes that enter into its makeup. It
is the process of unfoldment of the various components of an entity, gath-
ered into a prehensive unity, that we experience as the sense object; it is not
the components themselves that we experience as the sense object, but our
unified prehension of these unfolding components. Thus, nature becomes
a structure of evolving processes, and space and time the locus of the unifi-
cation of these processes into sense objects. It is ridiculous, therefore, to ask
if color is less real than, say, spatial location; color is one ingredient in the
process of realization; it enters into the unified prehension of an event, and
apart from prehension, there is no realization.

There is a further consequence derivative of this notion of nature as a
unity of processes. This is that the modal ingression (realization) of an
event into space-time bears a relation to past events, to contemporary
events, and to future events. An event in itself is a unity of processes, but
in combination with other events, past or present or future or all three,
the event becomes one process in the unity of a still larger event. Thus the
mode of ingression of any given event is subject to the influence of its an-
tecedents, its contemporaries, and its descendants, which are in turn in-
fluenced by still other events, and so on. The unity of process that is an
event therefore incorporates the influence of all events; each event mirrors
within itself every other event. Insofar as a given event is considered apart

from other events, which participate in its unity in making it just that
event and no other, our understanding of the event remains incomplete.
The total unity of an event can only be understood with reference to the
totality of process, that is, to the whole of nature. Thus, in this view, a way
is cleared not only for the implicit reference to past events to be found in
the formulation of scientific laws but for our own psychological unity of
memory, immediate realization, and anticipation.

Let us see if this definition of an entity as an evolving process can shed
light on the problem of organisms. One recalls that an entity is a unity
of processes requiring a given, indivisible span of time, or epoch, for its re-
alization. The duration of an epoch can vary for different entities, de-
pending on the complexity and number of processes entering into their
realization. An electron or a mu-meson require a very short epoch for
their realization, on the order of picoseconds; a mayfly requires a some-
what longer epoch, on the order of forty-eight hours; a human or an ele-
phant require an epoch of fifty to a hundred years for their realization,
while a universe requires an epoch on the order of tens of billions of years.
The point is that each of these entities requires its full epoch to realize it-
self as a unified totality of process. Its full identity as a realized actuality
depends on its full epoch of evolving becoming. It is nothing at any one
of its instants; it is itself only when taken in its unified totality of succes-
sive instants.

Thus, identity, for any actual entity, consists of a unity of ongoing
process, a unity that incorporates into its present aspect conditioning in-
fluences of its past and the anticipation of its future. In a living organism,
this immediate experience of ongoing process becomes identifiable with
its notion of self; that is, its awareness of itself, its selfhood, becomes
synonymous with its experience of dynamical process. To clarify this, let
us state what the selfhood of an organism does not consist of. Selfhood
does not consist of its identification with the material bodily components,
for its material components are continually being effaced and replaced
with others by the process of metabolism:

. . . the material parts of which the organism consists at a given
instant are to the penetrating observer only temporary, passing
contents whose joint material identity does not co-incide with the
identity of the whole which they enter and leave, and which sus-
tains its own identity by the very act of foreign matter passing
through its spatial system, the living form. It is never the same
materially and yet persists as its same self by not remaining the

same matter. Once it really becomes the same with the sameness
of its material contents—if any two time slices of it become, as
to their individual contents, identical with each other and with
the slices between them—it ceases to live; it dies. . . (H. Jonas
1966, pp. 75-76)

We see, then, that for the organism not only does identity persist in
material change but it depends on this material flux. This is what is meant
by the statement that its selfhood is derived from its experience of itself as
a process. Its self-awareness does not apply to a material structure, but to
an event-structure. The event-structure, the process in question, is the
persistence and development of bodily form in the face of material flux.
For in the case of living organisms, form is not determined by material
substrate:

. . . viewed from the dynamic identity of the living form, the
reverse holds: the changing material contents are states of its en-
during identity, their multiplicity marking the range of its effec-
tive unity. In fact, instead of saying that the living form is a
region of transit for matter, it would be truer to say that the
material contents in their succession are phases of transit for
the self-continuation of the form. (Jonas 1966, p. 80)

Thus, the selfhood of the organism is identified with the dynamical

persistence of form, a process.

It can be seen, then, that organisms exhibit an outward orientation to-
ward a twofold transcendent horizon: toward the horizon of the outer
world as the source of material for the sustenance of its form and toward
the horizon of the future into which it is ever on the verge of extending by
its existence as a continuous process of becoming. But life also must be
characterized by an internal horizon, a self-integrating identity of the
whole, spanning the succession of ever-vanishing substrata. There is no
way of inferring this internal horizon from external characterization alone;
it must derive from our own immediate experience of the organic mode of
being. But it is the only way by which the self-integrative persistence of a
metabolizing organism can be explained. The mode of realization of an
inorganic entity can be explained by its external relations alone, but the
persisting self-identity calls for forms of process transcending mere exter-

nal relations.

Thus, the self-integrative persistence of the special form of process that
is an organism is characterized by an internal horizon that is indicative of
its possessing the quality of mind. Therefore, any view of the organismic
process that strives for completeness must take account of mind as a factor
entering into the process. If, then, mind is an element of the total process
comprising an organism, is it possible to explain the fact of organisms
without reference to the influence of mind? This amounts to saying, does
mind enter into the organism as a causative element in its existence, or is
this merely attributable to physical interactions? One can see that since
the states of mind do enter into the total plan of the organism, it follows
that it affects each subordinate component of the process, until the small-
est subordinate components, for instance electrons, are affected:

Thus an electron within a living body is different from an electron
outside it, by reason of the plan of the body; the electron blindly
runs either within or without the body; but it runs within the
body in accordance with its character within the body; that is to
say, in accordance with the general plan of the body, and this plan
includes the mental state. (Whitehead 1967, p. 79)

We have been examining heretofore some of the methodological as-
sumptions of science and have found, particularly with reference to the
classical notion of material, that many of these assumptions have a limited
application. The notion of material entities having simple location and
indefinite temporal divisibility, while apparently congruous with (some)
aspects of our daily experience, turns out to have the character of an ab-
straction when our observations focus on the minutest levels of submolec-
ular organization. We have found the characterization of material entities
as vibratory epochal processes to be more consistent with the discoveries
of quantum mechanics and have found that this model also opens the way
to the explanation of organisms and mind.

Perhaps we have arrived, then, at a point where we can suggest a basic
reformulation of the metaphysical basis of science. This suggestion is, first,
that science consider the event as the ultimate unit of natural occurrence,
and second, that in seeking to analyze the component elements of an
event, it should look for primary organisms rather than material parts. For
there is in nature virtually nothing that exhibits the classical attributes of a
material; nature is a process of processes, and processes within processes.
Accordingly, the analysis of nature should concern itself with the analysis

of aggregate processes into primary processes. Biology is concerned with
the larger processes that are organisms, whereas physics concerns the smaller
processes, which are likewise organisms, in that they experience a reference
to things past, immediate, and future. For the primary organisms, we ob-
serve this relation as a factor in its external aspects; for ourselves, we ob-
serve it as an element of our psychological field of awareness. But if we
experience, in experiencing ourselves as process, our essential relatedness to
other processes in other times and places, are we justified in denying this
experience to other, primary organisms? Is it not more affirmative to as-
sume that, in some sense, a primary organism, being a dynamical process,
is aware, or experiences itself as process and, to the extent that it does,
possesses itself an internal horizon? Of course, this question can never be
resolved by science, focusing as it does only on the external aspects of a
process. It seems reasonable, however, to postulate an element of mind,
that is, an internal horizon, as basically intrinsic to even the simplest pri-
mary organism. This postulate allows for the reintroduction of value and
teleology into nature. Clearly, nature appears to our common sense to have
purpose and value; it seems to evolve from simple to more complex, from
primitive to more advanced, from less conscious to more conscious. In-
deed, it appears to have direction, and it seems to have purpose, which
guides it in that direction. Yet, we are asked by science, in the face of all ev-
idence, all reason, and all intuition, to regard nature as purposeless, mean-
ingless, and valueless. If we admit mind as an aspect of even the most
primary organism, however, this vast complexity suddenly takes on an
added meaning; a new and deeper sublimity replaces that sense of baffling
futility and waste with which a blind universe confronts us.

Chapter 4

Toward a Holographic Theory of Mind

A philosophy of life comprises the philosophy of the organism and the philoso-
phy of mind. This is itself a first proposition of the philosophy of life, in fact
its hypothesis, which it must make good in the course of its execution. For the
statement of scope expresses no less than the contention that the organic even
in its lowest form prefigures mind, and that mind even on its highest reaches
remains part of the organic. (Jonas 1966, p. 1)

The central, in some ways the final, question in any philosophy of organ-
isms, which seeks to be complete, is the question of mind. Any thorough '
explication of the phenomenon of life must face squarely the problem of
the existence of mind and must explain its qualities adequately in terms
that do not beg the question; that is, it cannot seek to understand the
nature of mind in physicochemical, reductionist terms. The insufficiency
of such an approach will inevitably betray itself, for just as the operations
of organisms cannot be reduced to the physicochemical properties of the
matter that composes them because they impose boundary conditions on
the incorporated matter in such a way that the operation of the material
organic system as a whole transcends the boundaries of physics and chem-
istry, so the same holds for mind on the next hierarchical level of organiza-
tion. It exhibits qualities peculiar to itself, such that it is not simply
reducible to events occurring in the organic matrix from which it arises, al-
though it certainly includes those events in the conditions of its organiza-
tion and functioning. This amounts to saying that mind is more than the
sum of its parts, just as the fact of a living organism is more than the sum
of its atoms and molecules and their interactions; in each case, an adequate
explanation must have recourse to a more comprehensive hierarchical level
of organization than the physicochemical level, in the case of organism,
and than the organic level, in the case of mind. The existence of an organ-
ism or of a mind imposes boundary conditions on the next lower level of
organization. Organisms and minds incorporate and yet transcend such
lower levels (M. Polanyi 1968).

The hierarchical structuring of organisms and minds implies that mind
cannot be totally explained through organic structure, having as it does
principles of organization that transcend the organic level; still, a problem
remains to be dealt with, that of the nature of the relationship between

mind and its physical matrix, a brain. That the organization of the mind
does partially reflect the physical organization of the brain can be seen by
anyone willing to accept the evidence of experimental neurophysiology.
The questions still to be answered are: What is the nature of the physical
interface of brain and mind? Where is this interface found in the neural
structure? and How does the organization of the brain reflect the organi-
zation of the mind? In recent years, neurophysiology has come a consider-
able distance toward answering these questions, particularly through its
discovery of the apparently holographic nature of brain-mind organiza-
tion. In this chapter, we intend to examine this holographic principle of
neural organization by outlining the state of empirical discoveries to date
in this area of research. Finally, we will venture some philosophical specu-
lations intended to suggest that the holographic structure of mind may
simply reflect, on one hierarchical level, a principle of organization pres-
ent at all levels in nature.

Holography is a young science whose enormous potential is only now
beginning to be explored, although its principles were first discovered acci-
dentally, in 1947, by Dr. Dennis Gabor in trying to design improvements
for the electron microscope. It was not until the advent of lasers, which
provided a coherent, concentrated light source, that the technology be-
came available that could implement the principles (cf. Pennington 1968,
pp. 40-49). Conventional holography is a technique for making lensless,
three-dimensional photographs, whose basis is fairly simple. A low-
intensity laser beam is passed through a semiopaque mirror, causing part
of the beam to pass through the mirror and illuminate the object to be
photographed. This light is then reflected from the object onto a photo-
graphic plate in front of the object. Simultaneously, the other part of the
beam is reflected off a series of mirrors such that it falls on the photo-
graphic plate at an angle to the beam reflected from the object (see fig. 1).
This convergence of the two beams of coherent light creates an interfer-
ence pattern that is recorded on the photographic plate. The image that is
recorded on the photographic plate, which is called the hologram (Gr.
Holos, whole), bears little resemblance to the object photographed; it is
merely a record of the interference pattern of the two intersecting beams.
When this hologram is reilluminated using a single, unsplit laser beam,
however, a unique phenomenon occurs: Floating in empty space just
beyond the illuminated hologram is a fully three-dimensional replica of
the object originally photographed. Such a holographic image does not
merely give the illusion of three-dimensionality; it is as three-dimensional

as the original object, can be viewed from any angle, will exhibit parallax
with other objects or holograms, and can be photographed with a conven-
tional camera. It is, in fact, indistinguishable from its original model by
vision alone and can only be so distinguished by passing one's hand or
other material object through the image to reveal that it is composed of
what in physics is called a standing waveform, an apparently motionless
arrangement of photons.

Holograms exhibit several other unique properties of particular rele-
vance to our discussion to follow. For instance, what are called volume
holograms have an as yet untapped potential for information storage. An
image can be recorded onto the hologram in the conventional manner de-
scribed; the plate can then be tilted slightly with respect to its recording
laser beams and the image of a second object reexposed onto the same
plate without disrupting the previously recorded image. The hologram
can then be decoded at angle I to yield an image of the first object, or at
angle 2 to yield the second object. A large number of separate objects can
thus be coded into a single hologram and replayed by illuminating the
hologram from the proper angles.

Another peculiar quality of holograms is that because the hologram
records a set of interference patterns, this pattern is distributed equally
and ubiquitously throughout the holographic plate, such that any part of
it embodies the whole image. In a conventional photograph, each point
from the scene corresponds to one point in the photograph; in a holo-
gram, each point is diffused to many points in the holographic plate.
Thus, one can take a hologram and tear it in half and then shine a laser on
one of the halves; the resulting image will be a reconstruction of the entire
object; if one then tears it into quarters and illuminates one of the quar-
ters, the result is still the same: The total image can be reconstructed from
any fragment of the hologram, right down to the very smallest chip of
the plate. In theory, a fragment of a hologram will yield a total image of the
object without significant loss of resolution unless the fragment is so small
as to approach the size of the wavelength of the illuminating beam. In
practice, however, the coarseness of the photographic emulsion will cause
a loss of detail considerably before this level is reached, so that while a
total image can be reconstructed from even a very small chip of a holo-
gram, if the chip is too minute, the image will be lacking in detail. Only
the details will be lost, however; the essence of the entire message will re-
main to the last. Similarly, if the hologram is layered (two or more im-
ages are recorded in the same hologram), each one of the images will be
preserved intact throughout each part of the hologram matrix.

We can thus distinguish two features of holography that make it unique
as an information storage device: The first is that any one of its parts is
equal to the sum of its parts, because the message is reduplicated ubiqui-
tously throughout every part of the hologram. If we had to formulate this
into a geometrical axiom, we would say that all points are cotangent. The
second feature is that the hologram records the essence of an object, and
thus, repeated superimposition of essences supplies the details, the particu-
larities, of the object when the total hologram is illuminated.

To understand the applicability of holographic principles to the organi-
zation of the brain, it is necessary to talk about memory. One of the para-
doxes of memory storage is that a person is born with practically all the
neurons that he or she will ever possess; whereas growth of normal tissue is
caused by cell division, the nerve cells do not divide, and, moreover, will
not regenerate if damaged, although the axon of a nerve cell can regenerate
provided the cell body containing the nucleus is undamaged. The problem
facing scientists investigating memory and learning has been one of under-
standing how the brain can store memories and learned information with
apparently no alteration of neural organization; how can new information

be stored in the brain in the absence of nerve-cell reproduction? The prob-
lem has been a baffling one for scientists searching for engrams, or memory
traces, some evidence of a neural reorganization corresponding to a stored
input of information.

This paradox was partially resolved by Karl Lashley (cf. Lashley 1950,
pp. 454-482) when he demonstrated that under certain conditions of pro-
longed or repeated stimulation, the nerve cell can multiply its production
of nerve fibers, thus creating new synaptic junctions without actual repro-
duction of the cells. This can occur in the following manner: The nerve
cells ordinarily are surrounded and prevented from growing new fibers by
encasing cells called glia. It has been found (Pribram 1971a, p. 471), how-
ever, that electrical stimulation of a nerve synapse triggers the production
of specific molecules of RNA, which have been found to cause (or at least
to be correlated with) heightened metabolic activity of the glial cells, thus
encouraging them to divide; the tip of the neuron fiber is then free to grow
between the daughter glial cells to form new contacts with the neurons be-
yond it. In this way, the synaptic microstructure can be modified by expe-
rience; an interrelated set of such modified neuronal synapses can
constitute the neural engram, the encoded memory trace. The result of
this process is that the brain develops a kind of neural model of the envi-
ronment, a spatiotemporal pattern of organization against which inputs
are constantly matched.

One aspect of the neuronal storage process had still to be understood.
Granted that an input of new information elicited the production of
a new set of neural junctions, which when restimulated decoded itself as a
memory or learned behavior, the question yet remained as to whether
there was a one-for-one correspondence between each part of the memory
or perception, or was the memory and/or perception distributed equally
throughout every part of the synaptic microstructure? In other words,
does one nerve cell, for instance, comprise some fragment of the total ex-
perience, one bit of information that will be lost to the whole if that
nerve cell is damaged? Or does each and every part of the synaptic en-
gram simultaneously contain all bits of the whole experience? Experi-
ments performed by Lashley, in which large areas of the cerebrum of rats
were destroyed without significantly impairing learning or recognition,
indicate that the latter case is the truer one. Lashley found that, while in-
tensity of recall was in proportion to the mass of the brain, nothing short
of removal of the entire cerebrum could interrupt recall altogether. Thus
he was led to postulate the principles of mass action and equipotentiality
in his theory of memory: Intensity of recall depends on the total mass of

the brain, but memory is recorded ubiquitously throughout the cere-
brum. Here, at last, we begin to gain a glimpse of the relevance of holog-
raphy in neural organization. As in a hologram, the meaning—stored
memory or learned information—appears to be stored ubiquitously
throughout the cerebral matrix rather than to be caused by the interrela-
tionship of separate parts. This is the implication, at least, of experiments
in which the disruption of the electrical field of the brain, using alumi-
num hydroxide cream, failed to impair pattern discrimination, while sur-
gical removal of large sections failed to impair memory, learning, or
recognition (Pribram 1971b, p. 47f.).

These experiments appear to demonstrate that memories and learned
behavior have multiple representation in the cortex; in other words, the
information is stored redundantly in the neural matrix so that removal or
disruption of part of the cortex will not distort the message stored in an-
other part. Redundant storage, however, is still not equivalent to holo-
graphic storage. The redundant system can be compared to a stack of
several hundred photocopies of the same message; when part of the stack
is removed, the message still resides in the rest of the stack. Ablation of the
cortex is analogous to removing part of the stack of pages. If, however, we
took the stack of photocopies, threw them up in the air, tore some into
fragments, and glued them back together at random, the conventional
message, even though redundant, would be disrupted; but if we had per-
formed this operation on a stack of holograms, no amount of random
shuffling, tearing, and repasting would disrupt the message, because the
entire message resides in each of the parts and does not depend on the re-
lationship between parts. If the brain truly is capable of storing informa-
tion in a holographic fashion, not only would it be unaffected by cortical
ablation, but it should not be disrupted by a random rearrangement of its
anatomy. Experiments involving just such an anatomical shuffle of parts
were carried out by Dr. Paul Pietsch, using cortical sections from salaman-
ders. The theory was that such shuffling of cortical parts would not dis-
rupt normal salamander behavior if the holographic theory were true:

In more than 700 operations, I rotated, reversed, added, sub-
tracted, and scrambled brain parts. I shuffled. I reshuffled. I sliced,
lengthened, deviated, shortened, opposed, transposed, juxtaposed,
and flipped. I spliced front to back with lengths of spinal cord, or
medulla, with other pieces of brain turned inside out. But nothing
short of dispatching the brain to the slopbucket—nothing
expunged feeding! . . . The experiments had subjected the holo-

graphic theory to a severe test. As the theory predicted, scrambling
the brains anatomy did not scramble its programs. Meaning was
contained within the parts, not spread out among their relation-
ships. If I wanted to change behavior, I had to supply not a new
anatomy, but new information. (Pietsch 1972, pp. 46, 48)

The clincher to these encouraging results came when Pietsch trans-
planted the brain of a tadpole to the cranium of a salamander. While the
salamander is a traditional predator on the tubifex worm, the tadpole is
symbiotic to it, using its sucker mouth to remove algae from the flanks of
the tubifex without harming it. Pietsch found that the salamander with the
transplanted tadpole brain mimicked the tadpole, and in more than eigh-
teen hundred trials, the salamander did not once attack the tubifex: The
transplanted herbivorous brain had carried its holographic set of peaceful
behavior patterns right into the salamander's cranium. Vindication of the
holographic theory of information storage was complete.

Two questions remain to be answered. Granting that the cerebrum can
store information in a manner analogous to holographic storage, then
what mechanism in the brain can function in the role of the interference
pattern set up by the two encoding laser beams in normal holography, and
what mechanism functions in the role of the single decoding beam used
for retrieval of the holographic image?

The key to answering the first question lies in the understanding that
holography does not depend on the physical presence of light waves.
Holograms have been constructed from sound waves and even infrared
waves. R. W. Rodieck (cf. Pribram 1969, p. 77) has shown that the mathe-
matical equations describing the holographic process match exactly what
the brain does with information, and computer simulations of holo-
graphic storage have been carried out on the basis of the equations (con-
volutional integrals and Fourier transformations) alone. It is not the
presence of physical waves, as such, that is needed for making a hologram,
but rather an interference pattern, a ratio of harmonic relationships:

The question remains: how can interference effects be produced
in the brain? One can imagine that when nerve impulses arrive
at synapses (the junction between two nerve cells), they produce
electrical events on the other side of the synapse that take the
form of momentary standing wave fronts. Typically the junctions
made by a nerve fiber number in the dozens, if not hundreds.
The patterns set up by arriving nerve impulses presumably form a

microstructure of wave forms that can interact with similar micro-
structures arising in overlapping junctional contacts. These other
microstructures are derived from the spontaneous changes in
electrical potential that ceaselessly occur in nerve tissue, and from
other sources within the brain. Immediate cross-correlations
result, and these can add in turn to produce new patterns of nerve
impulses.

The hypothesis presented here is that the totality of this process
has a more or less lasting effect on protein molecules and perhaps
other macromolecules at the synaptic junctions and can serve as a
neural hologram from which, given the appropriate input, an
image can be reconstructed. (Pribram 1969, p. 77)

The long-known functional areas of the brain, such as Broca's area
(speech cortex), the visual cortex at the back of the brain, or the auditory
cortex at the sides, may function as the mechanism for reconstruction of
a stored neural hologram to yield a memory, perception, or thought. These
areas are known to have a function in various modes of behavior and per-
ception, and for many years it was thought that they were storage sites re-
lating to specific functions such as speech, vision, hearing, and so on. In
the holographic theory, these centers would act not to store information,
but rather as processing stations for the encoding and recalling of pro-
grams from the holographic storage areas of the cerebral cortex. Thus,
these functional centers could operate in the role of the reconstructing
laser beam; whether the memory or perception was experienced visually,
auditorily, tactually, or as some combination would depend on what cen-
ters were activated in reconstruction, a process that would be equivalent to
using lasers of different wavelengths in reconstruction.

What kind of neural mechanism plays the role of the coherent
light source to make and display holograms? Perhaps a kind of
coherence results from the anatomical fact that the retina and
visual cortex are linked by many thousands of fibers arranged in
parallel pathways. Or it could be that the nerve cells in the visual
channel achieve coherence by rhythmic firing. Still another possi-
bility is that coherence results from the operation of the variety
of detectors that respond to such simple stimuli as the tilt of a line
and movement. . . (Pribram 1969, p. 77)

It is not possible to outline entirely the present state of experimental
and theoretical evidence centering on holographic neural organization.
Many areas of uncertainty still exist in current research that, it is to be
hoped, will yield to scientific understanding in the near future. One such
area is split-brain research, focusing on investigating the brains operation
when the corpus callosum, the intermediary pathway between the left and
right cerebral hemispheres, has been severed. Certain results of this research
suggest that each hemisphere records only specific kinds of information, a
finding that would tend to contradict the holographic theory of ubiquitous
storage; other theorists suggest that this may only indicate unequal access
to information in the right hemisphere, rather than unequal storage. A de-
finitive answer awaits further research. There is no doubt that other objec-
tions could be leveled at the holographic theory that have not been met by
us as laypersons. It seems clear, however, that the principles of neural orga-
nization do bear some significant similarities to holography, although it
would of course be presumptuous to claim that holography explains all as-
pects of brain organization. No such claim is made here; we seek only to
provide a basic understanding of the (probably) fundamental role played
by holographic structuring in the present picture of neural organization.
The interested reader should examine Karl Pribram's Languages of the Brain
(1971) for the current status of holographic theories of brain function.

Let us now turn to the more philosophical and speculative aspect of
this theory of mind. Granted that holography reflects in part the structure
and organization of the brain, and granted also that the brain and its
structure will in part reflect the nature of the mind arising from it, it fol-
lows therefore that the mind itself must in some sense be holographically
structured. The questions we must ask then are: (1) In what sense is the
mind holographically structured, and (2) why should it be so structured?

Let us illustrate the first question with a diagram representing mind-
world interaction. We can represent this interaction by two overlapping
circles, or realms, which we designate as A and B (fig. 2). Circle A

represents the physical world. Circle B represents the mind; this is the
seat of thoughts, will, creativity: in short, circle B comprises the experi-
encing self, which, through the brain-body liaison, makes its causal pres-
ence felt in the external world. We can think of circle B as existing in the
temporal dimension; it is a process developing through time, much in the
way that a piece of music develops through the temporal process of being
played. The realm where the two circles overlap, which we call C, forms
the region of interface between the physical world and the mind. Realm
C corresponds to the brain-body system; it forms the pathway by which
the mind receives information (perception), and also the mechanism by
which it responds to its perceptions. The comparison to holography that
this suggests can be made through analogy; the brain-body system repre-
sented by realm C is comparable to the physical apparatus necessary for
generating a hologram; the brain in this analogy is equivalent to the ex-
posed holographic plate; the body, with its afferent and efferent path-
ways, acts as the laser system, both receiving (perceiving) information and
encoding this information into the neural holographic plate. Realm B, in
this analogy, the realm of states of consciousness, is then comparable to
the actual holographic image, the standing wave form of ongoing aware-
ness. Circle A, which includes external reality and the subjectively experi-
enced state of the body, forms the subject, which becomes encoded
through receptors and afferent pathways into the neural holographic
plate, where it is then reconstructed as part of realm B, that part of
realm B representing its model of the external world. So far, this anal-
ogy lacks the notion of temporal flux. The interactions between the mind
and the body, and through the body with the external world, consist of
dynamic processes. The analogy with holography is more accurate if we
think of the process as a holographic movie rather than as a static, frozen
image. In this dynamic version, the neural hologram (the brain) is con-
tinually exposed and reexposed to the changing environment, thus en-
coding a constantly shifting set of interference patterns that are read out
as a temporally unfolding hologram, that is, the mind, with its constantly
shifting model of reality and associated thoughts, memories, images,
and reflections.

The holographic capacity of the mind for ubiquitous storage of infor-
mation can be seen most readily in the phenomenon of imagination. We
can imagine all of the universe or any part of it and thus can say that the
mind contains all of the physical world, that is, that the mind is a holo-
gram of external reality. This concept has been anticipated by the al-
chemists in their notion of man as microcosm, and also in the symbol of

the alchemical monad (cf. Jung 1952, pp. 103-104, 370), a synonym for the
Lapis Philosophorum, that part in which the whole may be found. Refer-
ence might also be made to the central axiom of Hermeticism, the Hel-
lenistic philosophical system that is the forerunner of alchemy: What is
here is everywhere; what is not here is nowhere (cf. Jung 1952). This is a
formula for a holographic matrix.

The complex symbol systems of alchemy are but one example of a
property that seems to characterize mind in general; that is, its tendency to
construct symbolic totality metaphors. The constructs of the mind are, by
and large, couched in symbols; even raw sensory data is seldom experi-
enced without symbolic interpretations, associations, and judgments. This
tendency of the mind to symbolize, to organize experience into meaning-
ful, coherent pattern is indicative of its ceaseless effort to somehow en-
compass reality, to construct a suitable model of self and world. This
quality of mind is seen best of all, however, in the dynamics of uncon-
scious processes, in dreams, vision, and trance; indeed, the individuation
process in Jungian psychology represents an attempt by the unconscious to
construct a totality symbol that both encompasses and defines the self and
the world in relation to the self. Jung has shown in numerous works (cf.
1952, 1959) the important role played by mandala symbolism as a means
for expressing the underlying order of psychic unity and totality. This
property of symmetrical, mandalic organization is found universally in all
artifacts of human thought, from the most abstract metaphysical systems
to the commonest objects of everyday use, and it, indeed, appears to be in-
trinsic to the organization of the psyche. May not this proclivity of the
mind to elaborate symbolic totality metaphors be reflective of the holo-
graphic structure of the psyche?

The unformed archetypes of the collective unconscious may be the
holographic substrate of the species' mind. Each individual mind-brain
is then like a fragment of the total hologram; but, in accordance with
holographic principles, each fragment contains the whole. It will be re-
membered that each part of a hologram can reconstruct an entire image,
but that the details of the image will deteriorate in proportion to its frag-
mentation, while the overstructure will remain. Out of this feature of
holography arises the quality of individual point of view and, in fact, in-
dividuality itself. If each mind is a holographic medium, then each is
contiguous with every other, because of the ubiquitous distribution of in-
formation in a hologram. Each individual mind would thus be a repre-
sentation of the essence of reality, but the details could not be resolved
until the fragments of the collective hologram were joined.

We have seen that the construction of an immaterial corpuscular stand-
ing waveform image from the physical substrate of the holographic plate
is closely analogous to the generation of the mind from the holographic
cerebral substrate. We will mention some other qualities of a hologram
that indicate its suitability as a model of mind. One example is the recon-
struction of a hologram using nonvisible light; this is perfectly possible
and in the mind would constitute an unconscious content. Another inter-
esting quality of holograms is that they can be constructed using laser
beams reflected from two objects, which then interfere on the holographic
plate; when the hologram is then reilluminated using one beam, both ob-
jects appear. Thus we can say that holographic matrices have the property
of associative recall.

The list of examples could be extended; however, these should illustrate
our point—that the mind itself, as well as the brain from which it arises,
does, to some extent, exhibit holographic qualities. Let us now venture to
speculate how and why this might be so.

Confronted with certain holographic qualities as a feature of both
mind and brain, it seems reasonable to ask whether holographic principles
are found on other levels of organization. We can find this most appar-
ently in the organismic realm, in the fact of the ubiquity and redundancy
of DNA. We refer to the fact that DNA seems to store information holo-
graphically, in that the nucleotide sequence of the molecule is identical in
every cell of a given organism. The DNA from one cell theoretically con-
tains all the information necessary to regenerate the entire organism. It is
due to the presence of certain inductors (notably RNA) that DNA
makes some cells into skin, others into nerves, and still others into mus-
cles, and so on. Thus, on the organismic level, also, we note the ubiquity
of genetic information, but also that each cell reads only some part of
the DNA-hologram, though the entire message is there.

When we descend to an even more basic level of organization, the
atomic level, the holographic metaphor is not so readily apparent. We are
essentially asking whether a holographic structure underlies the nature of
external reality itself. If this could be shown, it would explain why holo-
graphic structure is reflected in the organization of DNA, the brain, and
mind. We find that we have been preceded in our speculations by Leib-
niz, in his concept of the cosmic Monad (cf. Leibniz 1890, pp. 218ff).
Leibniz argues that the universe is a plenum, and that it is composed of a
simple substance that is everywhere and alike in all its parts, and that it
is by virtue of the affectations and interactions between these parts, or
monads, that distinctness and particularity arise:

. . . Each monad, its nature being representative, nothing can limit
it to representing only a part of things; although it may be true
that this representation is but confused as regards the detail of the
whole universe, and can be distinct only in the case of a small part
of things, that is to say, in the case of those which are nearest or
largest in relation to each of the monads—otherwise each monad
would be a divinity. It is not in the object, but only in the modifi-
cation of the knowledge of the object that monads are limited.
They all tend confusedly toward the infinite, toward the whole,
but they are limited, and distinguished by their degrees of distinct
perceptions . . . (Leibniz 1890, pp. 223, 226-228)

Leibniz is saying that each monad is identical to every other monad,
differing only by its perspective, its relation to the whole, that is, to
other monads, each of which mirrors every other. A similar idea is en-
countered in Whitehead's concept of the extensive continuum, which
he characterizes as a relational complex in which all potential objectifica-
tions find their niche. This extensive continuum can be conceived as the
set of all possible relationships, both actual and potential, both of all ac-
tual and of all potential entities. The extensive continuum therefore
... expresses the solidarity of all possible standpoints throughout the
whole process of the world. It is not a fact prior to the world; it is the first
determination of order—that is, of real potentiality—arising out of the
general character of the world (Whitehead 1967, p. 82). The extensive
continuum can thus be viewed as a holographic matrix of all potentiality.
Only a finite number of potentialities ever become realized as actual enti-
ties, in the same way that a holographic plate in which multiple images
have been stored at different orientations can be decoded at some an-
gles, but not at others:

In the mere continuum there are contrary potentialities; in the
actual world there are definite atomic actualities determining one
coherent system of real divisions throughout the region of actual-
ity. Each actual entity in its relationship to other actual entities is
in this sense somewhere in the continuum, and arises out of the
data provided by this standpoint. But in another sense it is every-
where throughout the continuum; for its constitution includes the
obj ectifications of the actual world and thereby includes the con-
tinuum; also the potential objectifications of itself contribute to
the real potentialities whose solidarity the continuum expresses.

Thus the continuum is present in each actual entity, and each
actual entity pervades the continuum. (Whitehead 1967, p. 83)

Quantum theory gives a view of the underlying substructure of reality
that is quite consistent with the holographically structured metaphysical
models of Leibniz and Whitehead. The particulate concept of matter has
been superseded by the idea that the atom is both wave and particle, both
continuum and actual entity. Bohr was the first to show that the electron,
the basic subunit of matter, could not be considered to have a spatiotem-
poral location (around the nucleus of an atom, for example), but instead
had to be mathematically approached as a cloud of probability: The free
electron possesses a mass coincident with the entire universe, and its oc-
currence at a given space-time locus is a function of extreme possibility,
not of definable position. This quantum concept of the electron is strik-
ingly reminiscent of the Leibnizian monad, that is both here and every-
where at once. Under the quantum theory, each quantum of matter is
both wave and particle and pervades the universe; there is no solid matter
as such, but only probability densities in the continuum, interference pat-
terns created by the interaction of quanta that, to the synthesizing percep-
tual mechanism in the brain-mind, appear as objects— actual entities
—rocks, tables, people, stars, and so on. Thus, a holographic image of re-
ality is reconstructed by the brain-mind from the underlying substrate of
concrescences of probability. Note the similarity here to the potentiality of
Whitehead's extensive continuum.

Would such a model of a holographic extensive continuum be inconsis-
tent with the theory of relativity? If all points reflect every other point,
and if all points are cotangent, as implied by a holographic theory of a
quantum-monad, then how can the relativity of space-time be preserved?
The objection is overcome if we postulate that space-time exists within each
monad (quantum); thus, each wave-particle would have relativistic effects
operating within it. A collection of such quanta (a galaxy, for instance)
would also have relativistic effects, resulting from the superimposition of
the space-time events occurring in each of its monadic parts. Remember
that in a holographic monadology not only does each part mirror the whole
but the whole (or any fragment thereof) mirrors each part; thus, we would
expect relativistic effects on all levels, from the quantum to the cosmic.

The example of hierarchical cosmic sub-structures (Wilson 1969)
shows that levels may be distinguished by a characteristic time or
frequency, which is to say that each level is temporally closed. This

suggests that the propetties of space and time are closure proper-
ties of structures, bringing to mind the basic idea of Leibniz that
space and time have no independent existence, but derive from
the nature of structures. Einstein's equivalence of dynamics and
geometry contained in his field equations (e.g., matter and density
determines spatial curvature) is also consistent with Leibniz's view
and a departure from the Newtonian idea that all structure exists
within an independent framework of space and time. It may then
be that from the various closures and partial closures of structures
and systems, we infer the descriptions we call space and time . . .
(Whyte et al. 1969, p. 55)

We can see that while relativity would operate in each monad, and in
the universe as monad, the extensive continuum of potentiality would
exist outside of space-time in a fifth Einsteinian dimension. Space-time,
and the relativistic effects arising therefrom, would exist as properties of
actual entities existing in the extensive continuum, but the continuum it-
self, underlying the configurations of three dimensions, would exhibit the
quality of simultaneity, as, in some sense, the holographic matrix of po-
tentiality would make all times simultaneous.

Let us now summarize the factual and speculative ground we have covered
in our holographic theory of mind. We began by noting the special quali-
ties of holography and went on to illustrate that the organization of the
brain seems to be in part holographic. We have introduced evidence which
suggests that the mind itself is holographic in quality and to that extent re-
flects its neural substrate. We have speculated that this holographic struc-
ture of the mind may proceed from the fact that holographic principles
operate on many structural levels; the ubiquity and redundancy of DNA
in organisms was mentioned as an illustration of this. We found that holo-
graphic principles might also be applied to the structure of reality itself by
virtue of the quantum nature of matter, whose wave-particle qualities sug-
gest a holographic monad. Finally, we saw that such a holographic model
of reality did not violate the laws of relativity if it were postulated that the
monadic substrate existed in a fifth Einsteinian dimension, that is, a fourth
spatial dimension. We are not prepared to assert the truth of our specula-
tions over other models of reality, recognizing that all such models are ulti-
mately constructs of the human mind, each no truer than any other.
Nevertheless, a holographic picture of mind and of external reality has en-
hanced our understanding of both.

Chapter 5

Models of Drug Activity

In recent years great strides have been made toward the elucidation of the
neurophysiological and neurochemical processes underlying the phenom-
enon of consciousness. The Cartesian dualism of strict separation of mind
and body has come to be recognized for what it is, at worst a dogmatic pre-
sumption without any empirical basis, at best a methodological expedient
(cf. chapter 3). Most physiologists have graduated to a view of the organ-
ism as a complex, integrated system, not reducible to merely the sum of
the physicochemical processes taking place within it. The primary feature
of organisms is, after all, organization—the complex spatiotemporal order-
ing of processes on the molecular and physiological level that makes the
organism an integrated whole rather than a disorganized mush of pro-
teins (cf. Sinnot 1950, p. 21). The next logical step in the recognition
of the principle of organization as a fundamental constituent of living
things is its extension to the problem of consciousness in higher organisms:

Interpreted in terms of the present hypothesis, therefore, the
whole conscious life of human beings, rich in ideas, in inspiration,
in intellectual subtleties, in imagination and emotion, is simply
the manifestation of an organized biological system raised to its
loftiest levels. Upon this the outer world impinges as a series of
sensations, real or imagined, and out of it come actions, either
actual physical responses or the more subtle ones of the mind.
What takes place between these events is, at bottom, the regula-
tory activity of the protoplasmic system. In its lowliest expression
this appears as regulatory control of growth and function. This
merges imperceptibly into instinct, and from these simplest of
psychic phenomena gradually emerge the complex mental activi-
ties of the higher animals and finally the enormously rich and
varied life of the mind and spirit of human beings. At no point
is there a sudden break, a radical innovation. The complex has
come from the simple by a gradual process of evolutionary pro-
gression. The basic phenomenon from which all this ultimately
arises, the fact that living things are organized systems, is the
fundamental problem still unanswered. Upon its solution will
depend our understanding not only of biology and psychology
but of the whole of man. (Sinnot 1950, p. 721)

In some branches of biology, notably the neurosciences, this funda-
mental interdependence of mental phenomena and physiochemical pro-
cesses has already achieved the status of a truism.

The relationship between electrochemical events occurring in the brain
and consciousness is made nowhere more clear than in the study of the in-
fluence of psychotropic drugs, and in particular the hallucinogens, on the
phenomenology of consciousness. The alteration of mental function that
hallucinogens can elicit illustrates that our apprehension of reality is
largely determined by chemical and physiological parameters. It is only
through an accident of evolution that our nervous systems—and the
version of reality that they provide us—have come to be structured as they
are. This profound interdependence of mind and the molecular configu-
ration of its neural substrate appear to be a direct repudiation of the exis-
tential proposition that nature is mute.

In recent years great progress has been made in the elucidation of the
molecular and biochemical mechanisms of nervous functioning, and the
interaction of these mechanisms with hallucinogenic and other psycho-
tropic drugs. Yet, for all the progress, the central question remains unan-
swered. This question, framed in its simplest terms, might be phrased
thus: What qualities characterize the physical interface between molecules
and mind?

To date, only tentative theoretical and speculative steps have been
taken toward answering this question. In this chapter we intend to present
our own hypothetical model for drug and neurotransmitter activity; it is
first necessary, however, to acquaint the reader with some fraction of the
hypotheses and experimental findings currently extant. We will first dis-
cuss the problems of drug action from the biochemical standpoint; here
we will focus on the questions of structural relationships between hallu-
cinogens and neurotransmitters, their metabolic uptake by the nervous
system, their enzymatic fates and possible endogenous origins in certain
kinds of enzymatic dysfunctions, and related considerations. Second, we
will consider the problem of drug action at the receptor site and will dis-
cuss problems involved with this study and current theoretical models.
Last, we will present our own theoretical model, using the preceding in-
formation as a basis for hypothesis.

Neurotransmitters are chemicals that mediate the propagation of nerve
signals across the synapse. They are released at the presynaptic nerve ter-
minal and cross the synaptic gap to react with a receptor on the surface

of a postsynaptic nerve (or other excitable postjunctional cell), and they
may either stimulate or inhibit the firing of the postjunctional cell. Only
two substances, acetylcholine and norepinephrine, have been definitively
shown to function as neurotransmitters, but other likely candidates in-
clude serotonin (5-hydroxytryptamine or 5HT), dopamine, epinephrine,
and histamine, among others. A neurotransmitter substance should con-
form to three major criteria: Nerves should be able to produce the chem-
ical, the chemical should be released when nerves are stimulated and react
with a postjunctional receptor to produce a specific biological response,
and some enzymatic or other mechanism should be available to rapidly
terminate the action of the transmitter (Axelrod 1974).

The structural configurations of a large number of hallucinogens have
been elucidated, and the similarity of these to certain neurohumoral fac-
tors has been noted:

When the structural types in figure 3 are compared, it is striking
to see how often indole structures appear, and always in the form
of tryptamine derivatives. These may be tryptamines without any
substitution in the indole nucleus or with hydroxy- methoxy- or
phosphoryloxy-groups in the phenol ring of the indole; or else the
tryptamine residue forms part of a polycyclic ring system, as in the
case of the beta-carboline and lysergic acid derivatives and of ibo-
gaine. The most specific and most potent hallucinogens, such as
LSD (d-lysergic acid diethylamide) and psilocybin, belong to the
tryptamine type.

Since they are tryptamine derivatives, the indolic hallucinogens
are structurally related to the neurohumoral factor serotonin
(5-hydroxytryptamine). Serotonin is widely distributed in warm-
blooded animals. It accumulates in the brain, where it plays a
role in the biochemistry of nervous regulations. Consequently,
it seems that certain tryptamine structures which occur so fre-
quently in hallucinogens, as well as in the neurohormone sero-
tonin, may be biochemically important in the metabolism of
psychic functions . . .

A chemical relationship similar to that between the trypta-
minelike hallucinogens and serotonin exists between the phenyl-
ethylamine derivative mescaline and the neurohormone
norepinephrine. (Schultes and Hofmann 1973, pp. 17-20)

In view of the structural analogies between neurohormones and the
hallucinogens, it is not surprising that many studies have shown an inter-
action between drugs and neurotransmitters. There are still problems in
finally delineating these interactions, since a drug will often exhibit a
variety of interactions; thus, while the following passage illustrates that
there is an interaction with serotonin and NE mechanisms, these are by
no means the sole types of action that can occur:

To the already formidable list of complications in the interpreta-
tion of the effects of these compounds, Kopin now proceeded
to add some others. If there are no transmitters on which these
drugs can act, and as there are three possible modes of interaction
(potentiation, inhibition, or both, with no net effect) there may
be as many as 3n possible modes of interaction produced by the
drug. To this one must add the quantitative consideration that
drugs often have one effect at one dose level, and the opposite at
another; action on different brain areas must be considered; the
fact that there may be more than one type of receptor of a mole-
cule will also be a determinant.

The effect of a drug may depend on its action at multiple sites.
For example, for effect X to materialize, the drug must inhibit
5HT synapses, potentiate NE synapses, and have no effect on
histamine synapses. For effect Y, it may be necessary to inhibit his-
tamine and NE synapses and have no effect on 5HT synapses, etc.
(Smythies, in Schmitt et al. 1971, p. 32)

The technical problems inherent in the study of chemical transmission
at the synapse have proved virtually insurmountable in the case of the
central nervous system. The result has been that experimental investiga-
tions have concentrated on the role of the neurotransmitter acetylcholine
(Mandell and Spooner 1968) in the peripheral nervous system. Hence,
many of the theoretical models for neurotransmitter function in the cen-
tral nervous system have been drawn from studies conducted on acetyl-
choline in the peripheral nervous system.

Any similar investigations of the synaptic events in the central nervous
system are complicated by several factors:

The technical problems involved with any attempt to use analo-
gously systematic research approaches to a potential transmitter
in the central nervous system are great. Peripheral synapses can
be isolated by microdissection, they can remain functional in
an isolated profusion experimental situation for hours, and their
activation can be manifested by clearly defined and measurable
phenomena (such as the miniature end-plate potential or the
contraction of smooth muscle). The central nervous system has
little in the way of focal synaptic regions. The dendrites and the
cell bodies of central neurons are densely covered with synapses,
many of which may be of a chemically heterogenous nature. In
addition, the extra-neuronal space is packed with a tangle of glia,
closely approximating the membranous surfaces of nerve cells
and possibly intrinsically important to their function. This makes
the isolated, chemical manipulation of central synapses extremely
difficult. (Mandell and Spooner 1968, p. 1443)

Because of these complications, most of our evidence for norepineph-
rine and serotonin as the primary central synaptic transmitters is at best
of an indirect nature. Data that seem to indicate that these compounds
act as neurotransmitters in the central nervous system include observa-
tions of regional differences in the distribution of these compounds in the

brain, a distribution of synthesizing and degradative enzymes that closely
parallels the distribution of the amine, high levels of these amines and of
enzymes related to their synthesis in the subcellular fractions associated
with synaptic vesicles, and high levels of degradative enzymes in the sub-
cellular fractions associated with synaptic structures (cf. Mandell and
Spooner 1968).

A diagrammatic model of the probable actions of a neurotransmitter at
the synapse is shown in figure 4. Drugs could alter neurotransmitter func-
tion by influencing one or more of these steps. Current theories as to the
possible nature of the interaction of hallucinogenic drugs with serotonin
and NE functions have tended to favor the concept that they function as
false transmitters and can be bound into the receptor site in place of the
endogenous neurotransmitters:

The false transmitter replaces the NE in the storage granules so
that less NE is released, because a constant number of molecules
are released by nerve impulse. False transmitters can compete for
neuronal uptake of NE. Thus the NE that is released will be
potentiated; blockage of uptake potentiates the action of the
catecholamine. On the other hand, the false transmitter might
interact with the receptor, preventing the NE from activating
it and thereby depressing the effect of the released physiologic
transmitter. Finally, the false transmitter itself may activate the
receptor, but usually not as efficiently as NE. In other words, a
single substance can, through at least six different mechanisms,
alter the effectiveness of the nerve impulse.

The reaction of these compounds may be understood if looked
at from the standpoint of the amine group. The amine group has
a potential for interacting with a wide variety of receptor sites. As
groups are added to the molecule, it becomes more difficult for
the molecule to interact with these various receptor sites. If one
has the phenylethylamine structure only, it will fit, perhaps, only
NE and 5HT; it will not fit the histamine site. If a methoxy group
is added, this may make it more difficult for it to fit the adrenergic
receptor, and it now reacts almost purely with the serotonergic
receptor. The chemical manipulation therefore changes the bal-
ance of the interaction of the compound with various receptor
sites. (Symthies, in Schmitt et al. 1971, pp. 29, 67)

A good deal can be learned about the actions of both neurotransmitters
and hallucinogenic drugs by studying the enzymatic mechanisms func-
tioning in their metabolism. Studies of this nature have shown clearly that
enzymes are present in the brain that are capable of synthesizing endog-
enous hallucinogenic compounds. Among the most important of these are
phenol-O-methyl transferase, which can O-methylate tyramine to form
the potentially psychotomimetic substance paramethoxyphenylethyla-
mine; N-methyl transferase, first isolated from rabbit lung, can synthesize
dimethyltryptamine and bufotenin from tryptamine and serotonin, and
hydroxy-indole O-methyl transferase, an enzyme of the pineal gland,
which can O-methylate N-acetylserotonin to form melatonia, and bufo-
tenin to form 5-methoxy-N,N-dimethyltrypamine. In addition, the hallu-
cinogenic substance 6-methoxyletrahydroharman_ has been found to be
identical with the pineal hormone adrenoglomerulotropine. A potential

precursor for this, 6-methoxyharmalan, has been found to derive from
metatonin:

Of much interest is the recent discovery of substances closely
related to the harmala alkaloids in animals. One of these is
adrenoglomerulotropine, a hormone of the pineal body, the chem-
ical identity of which has been indicated as 2,3,4,9-tetrahydro-
6-methoxy-i-methyl-iH-pyrido (3,4,6) indole. This substance is
identical to 6-methoxyletrahydroharman which has been shown
to be formed in vivo from 5-methoxy tryptamine and acetalde-
hyde. 6-methoxytetrahydroharman is an isomer of tetrahydro-
harmine, one of the alkaloids in Banisteriopsis, and in the African
Leptactinia densiflora. One more substance, 6-methoxyharmalan,
has been shown to derive, at least in vitro, from melatonin, which
results from the methylation of acetylserotonin. The enzyme
which makes this possible, hydroxyindole O-methyl transferase,
has only been found in the pineal body. (Naranjo, in Efron et al.
1967, p. 385)

In view of the natural occurrence in the brain of hallucinogenic com-
pounds, such as 6-methoxyharmalan, and of enzymes capable of originat-
ing similar compounds, it is not surprising that many researchers have
looked for enzymatic dysfunctions underlying certain types of mental dis-
ease, such as schizophrenia (cf. Snyder et al. 1974).

It seems unlikely that the biochemical causes of abnormal behavior can
be elucidated in the absence of any definitive understanding of the role
played by neurotransmitters (and possibly endogenous psychotomimetics)
and their related enzyme systems in the regulation of normal behavior.
Snyder (1974) makes the interesting speculation that methylated trypta-
mines, enzymatically derived from serotonin substrates, may function in
monitoring people's levels of internal and external perception. Little is
known about the function of serotonin itself in the modulation of per-
ceptions or mentation, but the following passage suggests that it might
function in a variety of ways:

Elkes also suggested that the 5HT system in the brain might
represent an ancient evolutionary system. Serotonin was widely
distributed through animal and even plant life (i.e., vertebrates,
molluscs, the sea anemone, and hairs of the white nettle). Can

it be that in some way the older biological function of 5HT could
be related to light and that a piece of (originally) light-sensitive
enzymatic machinery was in some way internalized and built into
some primitive nervous nets (the myenteric plexus, the pineal,
the raphe nuclei)? It is also well to remember that some powerful
plant growth hormones, the auxins, were indoles. Could the
indoles be growth regulators in the CNS? (Smythies, in Schmitt et
al. 1971, p. 26)

The speculation that 5HT function may be related to a light-sensitive
mechanism takes on added significance if considered together with current
data on the function of the pineal gland. The human pineal contains more
serotonin by weight than any neural structure of any mammalian species.
It contains the highest levels of the enzyme tryptophan hydroxylase, which
is essential in the synthesis of serotonin from tryptophan. The pineal also is
the only organ containing the enzyme HIOMT, which converts serotonin
to melatonin. We have already noted that the pineal contains the hallu-
cinogenic compound 6-methoxyharmalan.

The pineal is one of the least understood of the brain organs; until re-
cently, it was thought to be a phylogenetic relic left over from some reptil-
ian ancestor as a nonfunctional third eye. It is now generally recognized
as a functional endocrine gland. The pineal's probable evolutionary deri-
vation from a primitive third eye is supported by the fact that it is
known to receive a variety of environmental inputs and to respond to this
input by circadian fluctuations in its enzyme activity, including the activ-
ity of HIOMT and hence the production of melatonin:

The pineal gland is now known to receive two main types of input,
photic and olfactory, and to emit two main types of output, anti-
gonadal and melatonin.

First and most important, the pineal gland receives sense from
the retina. This is not the sense of sight as we know it. It is a
description of intensity, type, and timing of light, and perhaps
of other characteristics of light of which we are consciously
unaware. . .

Next, there is input from that area which once was known as
the rhinencephalon, the smell brain, and which now in the United
States goes by the name of the limbic system or visceral brain . . .
(Wiener 1968, p. 915)

Evidence also exists that indicates that the pineal is sensitive to other
kinds of input in addition to photic and olfactory, including temperature,
sound, long wavelength light, and X rays (Wiener 1968, pp. 923, 931).

Pineal output appears to be regulated by an antagonistic relationship
between the pineal and the pituitary. They affect many of the same target
organs, including melanocytes, gonads, brain, thyroid, thymus, and
adrenal cortex, and both glands influence growth of body and of tumors,
carbohydrate and fat metabolism, diuresis, and blood pressure (Wiener
1968). In general, the pineal tends to have an inhibitory effect on pitu-
itary hormones. This pineal-pituitary antagonism extends particularly to
an interaction between pineal melatonin and pituitary MSH (melanocyte
stimulating hormone). The only known functions of these hormones are
on pigment cells (melanocytes); melatonin lightens skin pigment cells by
concentrating pigment granules, while MSH darkens pigment cells by
dispersing the granules through the cytoplasm of the cell. Although mela-
tonin is the most powerful skin-lightening substance known, its precur-
sor, serotonin, does not have any skin-lightening effect in doses up to
4,000 micrograms (Wiener 1968). These two pigment-affecting hormones
have been regarded by some as a phytogenetic fossil without any partic-
ular function in humans. Wiener (1968), however, has proposed the bold
hypothesis that the melanocytes may function as a source of pheromones,
that is, exohormones or external chemical messengers (ECM), substances
released by an organism into the environment to affect the behavior of
other organisms:

All pituitary and pineal hormones that we know, except for MSH
and melatonin, exert some trophic or antitrophic effect on other
secretory cells. The MSH-melatonin pair, on the other hand, seem
to act largely on pigmented cells of the skin periphery, not to reg-
ulate production of any known chemical messengers, but to push
and pull pigment granules around the cell, and that in frogs rather
than in man . . .

The pigment cell makes no important hormone that acts on its
owner's body. But it is located at the surface of the skin. Could
it be making a hormone that acts on someone else's body, an exo-
hormone rather than an endohormone? (Wiener 1968, p. 932)

His hypothesis is interesting and suggests the related speculation that
the neurotransmitterlike hallucinogens found in the plant kingdom may

similarly act as pheromones (or, more accurately, allomones) when they
interact with a mammalian nervous system. Indeed, it seems reasonable
to speculate that neurotransmitter-type molecules may not only function
in nervous systems but also as carriers of certain kinds of information
from the environment to the organism, and from the organism to other
organisms. We will return to this speculation, and to the question of
pineal function, after we have presented our own theoretical model for
drug action at the receptor sites.

Up to this point, we have been discussing, in broad terms, some of the cur-
rent thinking regarding possible modes of action for hallucinogenic drugs.
The probable function of neurotransmitters was outlined. The structural
analogies between many of the hallucinogens and CNS transmitters were
noted; the parallels between the localization of neurotransmitters and the
regional uptake of hallucinogens, and their possible function as false trans-
mitters, was also mentioned. Next, we reviewed the evidence that enzy-
matic pathways exist in the brain that could be capable of producing
endogenous psychotomimetic substances from neurotransmitter substrates.
Finally, we pointed out that there is likely an important, if little under-
stood, relationship between the pineal and pituitary glands in the regula-
tion of many of these precursor substances, that the pineal gland has been
shown to respond to a variety of external stimuli, and that it may play a
role in the production of exohormones or ECM. The bulk of the points
we have reviewed up to now represents little that is unorthodox in the cur-
rent state of neurophysiological theory, and our primary purpose has been
to provide an informational background for what follows. We must now
focus our attention on the more specific question of the sequence of mo-
lecular events at the synapse, and the possible influence on these events of
hallucinogenic compounds.

In the first section of this chapter, we reviewed some of the data relat-
ing to the probable functions of neurotransmitters in the central nervous
system and some of the ways in which these functions might be altered by
hallucinogenic drugs. In the course of our discussion, we noted that de-
tailed experimental investigations of these problems are hampered by a
host of formidable technical problems. The problems associated with the
study of the neurotransmitters, however, appear minimal when compared
with those encountered in any attempt to characterize the molecular na-
ture of the receptor site. While a good deal is known about the molecular
configuration of the neurotransmitters, and that of drugs that interact
with them, this has provided little in the way of clues as to the molecular

specifications of the receptor site. Structure-activity studies can lead to
tentative deductions at best, since a drug's action may be influenced by
factors other than its interaction with a receptor site. The receptor site is
generally assumed to be located in protein, lipoprotein, or glycoprotein
present in the membrane, and the neurotransmitter binding into the re-
ceptor site is thought to induce some conformational change in the
macromolecule that opens the ionic channel. Unfortunately, this cannot
reveal much about the specific chemical nature of the receptor because of
the wide variety of groups present in proteins, lipids, or carbohydrates
with which amines can interact. The problem would be lessened if some-
thing were known on independent grounds about the chemical nature of
the receptor site (Smythies 1970).

Recent evidence indicating the presence of RNA in synaptosonal
membrane (Morgan and Austin 1968) has cast doubt on the assumption
that the receptor site must be located in protein, lipid, or polysaccharide,
and Smythies has proposed the hypothesis that RNA or ribonucleopro-
tein present in the membrane may function as a primary receptor site.
According to the model elaborated by Smythies, the possible functional
significance of serotonin, or one of its structurally analogous derivatives,
binding to a nucleic acid site in the membrane is that RNA may act as a
channel for the passage of charged ions (and, perhaps, amines themselves)
through the membrane. The intercalated compounds would affect the
torsion of the RNA helix, causing it to act as a regulatory shutter mech-
anism, perhaps involving charge-transfer complexes:

Segments of helical RNA may be arranged perpendicular to the
surface and running through it from side to side: Each segment
will provide two helically wound half tubes connecting the inte-
rior of the cell with the exterior. The long RNA molecule would
thus run a convoluted course through the membrane. The half
tubes could be converted into full tubes or channels by running
flexible molecules with right basic bonding groups (such as poly-
amines like spermine) between the phosphate groups on adjacent
turns of the helix. Thus the RNA molecule will compose one
potential large tube subdivided into two smaller tubes separated
by a shutter —that is, the hydrogen bonded base pairs. If the
base pairs were disrupted, the base pairs could fly apart and open
up the full lumen of the tube. The maximum length of RNA
required to cross an average membrane would be about two coils.
The channel could also consist of an RNA shutter of shorter

length leading to a protein channel. Now, as Hofmann and Ladik
(19 61) have shown, nucleic acids have certain very interesting
properties in an electrical field. Normally they are insulators, but
if they are located in an electrical field parallel to their own length
and a powerful electron donor or acceptor intercalates at one end,
the entire molecule can become a conductor by means of a migra-
tion of pi electrons in the electrical field. The resulting charge-
transfer can polarize the base pairs and disrupt the hydrogen
bonds joining them so that they come apart and the double helix
unwinds. In our model the electrical field is provided by the rest-
ing potential of the neuronal membrane and the electron donor
is 5HT. If this intercalates between the first base pairs on the outer
end of the helical RNA, the helix could open up thus opening
the internal shutter in the channel making it large enough to
transmit hydrated Na+ or K+ ions depending on the length of
the holding polyamine stays. The flow of ions will depolarize the
membrane, the RNA again becomes an insulator and the base pair
hydrogen bonds reform thus closing the channel. In the meantime
the 5HT molecule will have been dislodged by the opening of the
helix and will be taken up back into the axon terminal. The exact
location of the serotonin pi cloud with respect to the pi cloud of
the base pairs may be a crucial factor in this mechanism. However,
a mechanism for closing the K+ pore is harder to visualize for here
the membrane becomes hyperpolarized.

This basic mechanism could be used for the transport of other
molecules across membranes, such as the biogenic amines them-
selves. (Smythies 1969, pp. 267-269)

Smythies's model is supported by evidence that 5HT and many of its
analogs, including LSD-25, N,N-DMT, and harmine can bond to DNA,
RNA, or both. The evidence for the binding of tryptamine and its analogs
to nucleic acids is central both to an understanding of Smythies's model
and also to our own hypothesis of drug action. It is quoted at length
below:

Siegal and Salinas state that fluorescence studies reveal strong
interaction between serotonin and nucleic acids. Yielding and
Sterglanz report an interaction between LSD and native DNA,
but not denatured DNA or RNA, using a reduction of native flu-

orescence and a change in ultraviolet absorption as criteria for
binding. . .

Tryptamine and its derivates could bind to nucleic acids in one
of four ways: (i) by ionic bonds between the positively charged
protenated amine N and the phosphate groups; (ii) by intercala-
tion between bases (RNA) or base pairs (DNA) and binding by
pi-orbital overlap; (iii) hydrogen bonding to the spare NH and O
orbitals of the base pairs in the floor of the two grooves of the
helix; and (iv) single-stranded nucleic acids would offer a fourth
way of binding by hydrogen bonds to the unoccupied sites on the
unoaired bases.

fluorescence value is decreased by substitution in the 5-position
by —OH or —OCH, and is increased by N,N-dialkylation with
larger groups than methyl (for example, ethyl, isopropyl, butyl,
benzyl). Of the latter compounds the diisopropyl and dibutyl
derivatives appear to react more vigorously with RNA than with
DNA. One possible explanation for these differences may derive
from the fact that 5HT in solution may form a complex with itself
(dimer) (by pi-cloud stocking and ion-dipole bond between the
N of one molecule and the O-delta of its companion). This com-
plex might not itself be able to bond to nucleic acid. 5HT,
bufotenin, and 5-O methyl-bufotenin could form such complexes
and thus less would be available to bond to nucleic acid. Trypta-
mine would form such a complex to a lesser extent (its N could
bond directly to the pi-cloud). In the case of the higher dialky-
lated products the ion-dipole bond would be lessened by steric
hindrance and thus more of the compound would be available to
bond to nucleic acid . . .

Other substitutions on the ring induce a different reaction. Fig-
ures 5 and 6 show the results for additional compounds. This
indicates that compounds with bulky ring substituents in the 5
or 6 positions (particularly, 6-chlorotryptamine) have higher
reduction in fluorescence values with DNA than RNA. Thus
compounds with bulky N substituents appear to bind better to
RNA and some with bulky ring substituents to DNA. Figure 7
shows that there is not much difference in the reduction in fluo-

shows that there is not much difference in the reduction in fluo-
rescence of harmaline and tetrahydroharmine in reaction with
DNA or RNA, but harmine with its bulkier ring system appears
to bind better to DNA.

These facts may be explained as follows: (i) tryptamines may
not bind to the phosphate groups of nucleic acids because the
lipophilic nature of their molecules would inhibit binding to so
hydrophilic a region; (ii) if the tryptamines bind by lipophilic
interactions with nucleic acids, that is by intercalation between
the bases of RNA and the base pairs of DNA, efficient binding
will require maximum pi-cloud overlap. In the case of RNA this
will be obtained if the tryptamine binds between two ordered
purine bases with its side-chain out so that maximum pi-cloud
overlap is hindered. But a large group on the side chain will not
affect binding as this will be free. In the case of helical nucleic
acid, the pi cloud is shared across the hydrogen bonds linking
the two bases. Thus the relatively small tryptamine molecule

(as compared with a typical DNA intercalator such as proflavin)
could tolerate a ring substitute such as Cl increasing its length
better than it would a bulky group on the N that also increases its
thickness. Likewise the bulky three and four ring molecules such
as harmine and LSD would have much more pi-cloud overlap
capacity in DNA than in single-strand RNA. Thus this evidence
would appear to support the hypothesis that tryptamine and its
derivatives bind to nucleic acids mainly by intercalation.
(Smythies and Antun 1969, p. 1061)

Neurotransmitters and their analogs are not the only compounds with
the ability to bond to nucleic acids. One of the best-studied of such com-
pounds is the acridine proflavin (fig. 8); note its similarity to harmine (cf.
fig. 3). This compound binds by interaction between the base pairs of the
double helix, resulting in a partial unwinding of the helix in the region of
the intercalated molecule. Intercalated molecules are thought to be held
in place by strong electronic interactions with the base pairs above and
below the drug, and this results in a stabilization of the helix, as measured
in the higher temperature required to denature intercalated DNA (New-
ton 1970).

Smythies has elsewhere theorized in even greater detail as to the nature
of the 5HT bond site and possible points of comparison between 5HT
and its hallucinogenic analogs:

Thus 5HT could bond to ordered single-strand RNA by intercala-
tion (that is, pi-cloud overlap) between adjacent purine bases and
two hydrogen bonds (hydroxyl to ribose ring O and ribose OH).
It could bind to helical DNA by intercalation between base pairs
and one hydrogen bond (either NH to deoxyribose ring O or

hydroxyl H to the other deoxyribose ring), but it is not wide
enough a molecule to bind to both. And it could bind to helical
RNA by intercalation and no less than four hydrogen bonds . . .
[see fig. 9].

The hallucinogenic derivatives of tryptamine are characterized
by partial blockade of the bonding groups so that, whereas the
compound can still bind to the site and prevent the subsequent
attachment of 5HT, it does so without inducing the agonist effect.
Blockade of the active groups is affected by the following means:
(1) dialkylation of the amino group. This reduces ionic and hydro-
gen bonding and imposes additional steric effects. The N cannot
approach so closely to the bonding atom (01), and the result will be
that the indole ring will not occupy precisely the same place in the
site as in the case of 5HT. The function of 5HT in this site may be
concerned with charge-transfer reactions. As the pi-cloud energy in
5HT is concentrated in the 2 position the resulting slight displace-
ment of the indole ring in the bonding of such drugs as dimethyl-
tryptamine may disrupt this charge transfer process. A possible
target in this site for the transfer of charge would be a hydrogen of
the superjacent base pair (joining, e.g., the N of guanine to the O
of cytosine) and thus the action of 5HT in the site might be to dis-
rupt the H bond and thus initiate the separation of the two strands
of a helical RNA. (Smythies 1969, p. 265)

In Smythies's model, the postulated ability of 5HT, or one of its ana-
logs, to open the ionic channel by intercalating into an RNA receptor site
is based on the capacity to form a charge-transfer complex with the nu-
cleic acid. The charge-transfer mechanism will be of central significance
in the presentation of our own model in the pages following. Therefore, a
few general comments on charge-transfer complexes in living systems
seem warranted. We encountered such comments in the observations of
Albert Szent-Gyorgyi (i960):

Charge-transfer allows us to transfer an electron from one sub-
stance to another without major loss in energy, since it does not
require a rearrangement in molecular structure . . .

By charge-transfer relatively inactive molecules may acquire
a high reactivity. The donor, having developed a hole in its
low-lying ground level, becomes a good acceptor, while the accep-
tor having acquired an electron on its high-lying excited orbital,

figure 9 Intercalation of Drug Molecules into DNA

(A) A diagram to illustrate the secondary structure of normal DNA. (B) A dis-
torted DNA structure resulting from intercalation of drug molecules. (Based on
original drawings by Lermnan 1964). (C) Mode of fit of 5HT into helical RNA
intercalation site. (Smythies) (D) Diagrammatic representation of the actino-
mycin-DNA complex based on the molecular model proposed by Hamilton et al.
(1963). The cyclic peptide chains of the antibiotic are represented as circles filling
the minor groove of the DNA helix for a distance of about three base pairs. B, C,
and D are structural near-relatives of the harmine-nucleic acid complex.

becomes a good donor. A charge-transfer complex is something
between a regular closed-shell molecule and a free radical, and
the great reactivity of free radicals need not be emphasized. If
the complex dissociates, as happens in extreme cases, two real free
radicals are formed.

An acceptor may accept an electron also from a saturated energy
band, thus creating a hole and rendering the band conductant.
Conversely, a donor may donate an electron to an empty energy
band, rendering this bond conductant. So charge-transfer opens
the way for semiconduction into biology . . .

In valency saturated compounds electrons occupy orbitals in
pairs. Electrons have their spin, and a spinning electron is a tiny
magnet. Since the two electrons occupying the same orbital always
spin in opposite directions, they cancel out each other's magnetic
moments. However, if the two electrons become separated, as
may be the case in a strong charge-transfer, they may no longer
compensate one another, rendering the substance paramagnetic:
as soon as the two electrons are no longer strongly coupled, and
occupy different orbitals, they become relieved of the limitation
of the Pauli principle according to which two electrons, forming a
pair on the same orbital, must spin in opposite directions. If one
of the two unoccupied electrons reverts its spin, the complex goes
into the triplet state, adding a paramagnetic component. . .

There are two methods for detecting paramagnetic behavior:
the magnetic balance and the electron spin resonance (ESR). The
former is rather crude as compared to the latter. The signal given
in ESR depends on circumstances. Free radicals given a sharp
and high ESR signal extending over 10-50 gauss. If the electron
is close to other unpaired electrons, it will be perturbed and may
give a broad signal. Exposed to the magnetic influence of different
nuclei it may split up, giving a hyperfine structure . . . How far
a charge-transfer complex will give a signal depends on circum-
stances. In a weak transfer the two electrons remain strongly cou-
pled, and so give no ESR signal, or give a signal only under strong
illumination. (pp. 67-72)

Szent-Gyorgyi continues on to point out that the strength of the ESR
signal given by a charge-transfer complex will be in direct proportion to
the strength of the charge transfer. If strong reductants are used as donors

and strong oxidants as acceptors, then the ESR signal will be correspond-
ingly stronger.

What possible significance could the formation of charge-transfer com-
plexes in living systems have? The following comments on its possible role
in drug action are relevant here:

We may ask, for instance, whether charge-transfer is not involved
in drug action, some of the drugs acting as electron donors or ac-
ceptors. It is difficult to predict the biological effects of such a
charge-transfer, for the action will not only depend on the ques-
tion, whether electrons are donated or tapped off, but will also de-
pend on the site of action. The cellular membrane, for instance,
which dominates many functions of the cell, has mostly a negative
charge inside and a positive one outside. So electrons donated at
the inside should increase the charge and lead to hyperpolariza-
tion, and with it to inhibition, while electrons donated at the out-
side will decrease the potential and can be expected to cause
excitation. The opposite will hold for electron acceptors. We can
be prepared also to meet paradoxical results. Let us suppose that a
biological substance acts by donating electrons. A drug, acting as
an electron donor, may compete with a natural substance for its
acceptor interfering thus with the normal course of electron trans-
mission, this drug though itself a donor, may produce an effect
which corresponds to the inhibition of electron donation. In spite
of all these incertitudes we may expect one definite interrelation:
If a substance exerts its biological activity by accepting or donat-
ing electrons, then it should have exceptional donor or acceptor
properties. (Szent-Gyorgyi 1960, p. 1071)

Considering the preceding information relevant to charge-transfer com-
plexes, we may ask the question: Are serotonin and its analogs likely can-
didates for participation in the formation of charge-transfer complexes
with nucleic acids, as was suggested by Smythies? We again refer to Szent-
Gyorgyi (1960) for a decidedly affirmative answer:

Although serotonin is a somewhat stronger donor than indole, or
some of its derivatives such as tryptamine, this extraordinary reac-
tivity is characteristic for the indole formation in general and is in
no way explained by the energy values of the highest filled molecu-
lar orbital. . . There seem to be other hitherto unknown molecular

indices which entail this extraordinary reactivity. There is but one
general statement we can safely make about all this, and this is that
if Nature developed a substance for electron transfer, then she may
have given to this substance extraordinary qualities, which make it
likely that Nature developed this ring naturally for services of this
kind . . .

... It was shown that indoles are exceptionally good donors,
and a great number of biologically active substances contain an
indole ring (serotonin, lysergic acid, bufotenin, indole acetic acid).
Attempts were made earlier by Popov, Castellani-Oisi, and M.
Craft to connect pharmacological activity, like convulsant effect,
with electron donation. That indoles may actually act in their bio-
logical reactions as electron donors is further suggested by the fact
that the OH group, induced into the serotonin molecule at posi-
tion 5 equally increases pharmacological activity and the electron-
donating property. Serotonin is one of the strongest donors I ever
met, though the k of the highest filled orbital is but moderately
lower than that of indole (0.461). So there are still unidentified
molecular parameters which greatly influence donor acceptor
properties. (pp. 84-85, 108)

The possible ability of nucleic acids or nucleoprotein to function as ac-
ceptors is also touched upon by Szent-Gyorgyi (1960) in the following:

As the last item on my list of the peculiarities of the living state
I would like to touch upon one of the most intriguing observa-
tions of the last years, that of the very broad (ESR) signal given
by nucleoproteins (Blumenfeld, Kalmanson, and Shen-Pei). This
signal (if really due to the protein-nucleic acid complex) indicates
a density of unpaired electrons which is almost comparable to
that found in metals, to which metals owe their conductivity. This
finding, if corroborated, may lift a veil which now obscures the
real nature and meaning of protein, nucleic acid, and nucleo-
protein. (p. 134)

At this point, let us summarize briefly what has been discussed so far.
We began the first section of this chapter by discussing the functions of
neurotransmitters in the nervous system, and their probable chemical na-
ture. We noted the structural similarities between many hallucinogens
and the presumed neurotransmitters. The technical problems faced in any

attempt to study neurotransmitters in the central nervous system were
pointed out, and the indirect evidence implicating serotonin and norepi-
nephrine as the major central transmitters was cited. We presented a dia-
gram of synaptic events and current theories suggesting that drugs may
function as false transmitters. The parallelism between regional uptake of
drugs and the concentration of neurotransmitters in the brain was noted.
Next, we discussed enzymatic mechanisms and the evidence that hallu-
cinogens may arise endogenously. This led to a discussion of the possible
role of the pineal, both its overall function as a regulatory mechanism
of the nervous system and its possible implication in the origination of
endogenous hallucinogens. In the second section of our exposition, we fo-
cused on the question of drug action at the receptor site. We cited prob-
lems inherent in this study and discussed Smythies's theory of a possible
RNA or ribonucleoprotein receptor site. We noted that this could have
functional consequences through alteration of the torsion of the RNA
helix and the formation of charge-transfer complexes. The modes of bind-
ing of 5HT and its analogs to nucleic acids were considered in some depth.
Finally, we considered the nature and significance of charge-transfer com-
plexes in living systems and noted that indoles are excellent electron
donors, while nucleic acids are equally efficient electron acceptors. Here it
was also noted that strong charge-transfer complexes, such as would be ex-
pected in a nucleic acid indole complex, are characterized by a very strong
ESR signal. It has been necessary to quote other authorities at such great
length in the preceding pages to provide the reader with a basic grasp of
many fundamental concepts and problems, which are essential to an un-
derstanding of the speculation that is to follow.

Having reached this point, we can now present our own hypothesis
in broad outline. It is basically the following: What we experience as
thought or consciousness has its physical basis in quantum-mechanical
phenomena. We propose that the intercalation of 5HT, other neurotrans-
mitters, and hallucinogenic neurotransmitter analogs into an RNA recep-
tor site gives rise to three important consequences. The first of these,
already proposed by Smythies, is that the intercalation forms a charge-
transfer complex, which initiates the separation of the helix by polarizing
the base pairs; this allows charged ions to rush through the membrane. We
speculate that this intercalation may have two additional consequences.
The first is that the rapid bonding and debonding of intercalators causes a
rapid twisting and untwisting of the helix, and this gives rise to a vibratory
oscillation of the macromolecule. This oscillation, occurring within the

electrical field at the synapse, has the effect of generating an electromag-
netic waveform. This signal, however, becomes absorbed at certain fre-
quencies by low-energy electrons present in the charge-transfer complexes,
which are formed by neurotransmitters intercalating into the RNA. This
absorption of energy serves to modulate the signal and simultaneously sat-
urates the energy bands in the charge-transfer complex, canceling the po-
larization of the base pairs, allowing the RNA strands to rejoin. Exactly
this sort of absorption phenomenon is observed in electron spin reso-
nance spectrometry, so we can refer to the proposed process as an ESR
effect or an ESR signal.

Our speculation contends that the combination of modulated electro-
magnetic waveforms originating from the tens of millions of synapses ac-
tivated at any one time is detectable to the organism by some hitherto
unsuspected mechanism (possibly akin to holography) as a higher cortical
experience, as thought or consciousness. Further, the signals thus gener-
ated by the nucleic acid—indole complex are reflective of the continually
changing conformational topology of the nucleic acid or nucleoprotein as
it exists in its superhelixed, in vivo state. The ESR signal generated by this
mechanism might be capable of carrying information that somehow
would be experienced as thought. Such information probably does not
originate from the level of base pair organization, the level of the molecu-
lar code involved in genetic processes such as replication; this could not
convey much in the way of experience to the organism. What seems
more likely is that the information content of the signal is generated by
the dynamic conformational changes taking place at the secondary and
tertiary structural levels in the receptor. Nucleic acid in the test tube is far
different from nucleic acid in its superhelixed condition in a nucleus or
membrane. In its functioning, in vivo condition, it must be the site of fu-
rious molecular activity relating to a diversity of processes: protein synthe-
sis, replication, charge transfer, intercalation, deintercalation, changes in
torsion; all of this and more must be occurring constantly and simultane-
ously in living nucleic acid. Perhaps included in these regulatory functions
is the production of an electromagnetic signal that is modulated by an
ESR absorption effect. The modulation of this signal might be correlated
to experience; it would then be a continually unfolding readout of the
bioelectronic state of the neural network, experienced as the informa-
tional gestalten of mind and its models of the internal and external world.

To clarify the concepts associated with this speculation, it is necessary
to digress into a discussion of the nature of the paramagnetic properties

of the correct resonance frequency. This will then supply energy to
the unpaired electrons in the lower energy level, exciting them to
the upper level and reversing their spins in the process. This
absorption of energy by the electrons as they jump to the higher
level can be detected as an actual reduction in the power of the
electromagnetic radiation passing through the system, and this
absorption can then be displayed on an oscilloscope screen, or in
any other way that is normal in absorption spectroscopy. (pp. 3—6)

Nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) is a similar type of paramagnetic
phenomenon. Like ESR, NMR involves the generation of a signal by the
application of an external magnetic field, except that in NMR, shifts in the
orientation of the nucleus, rather than of the unpaired electrons, are mea-
sured with respect to the external field (cf. Dyer 1965). The major point for
our discussion, which would indicate that ESR rather than NMR would
function as the modulated carrier-wave, is that unpaired electrons are char-
acteristic of charge-transfer reactions and semiconduction, and as we have
seen previously, serotonin and many of its analogs can function as power-

ful electron donors and thus may give rise to charge transfer and semicon-
duction in neural RNA. NMR may be involved as well as ESR in these
phenomena, but the signal preceding from NMR would seem to be less
specifically characteristic of the kind of quantum-mechanical interactions
that we hypothesize are necessary to generate a modulated waveform.

We have seen from the observations of Szent-Gyorgyi that a strong
charge-transfer complex, such as may be formed by the intercalation of an
indole neurotransmitter into a nucleic acid receptor, can act to separate
the electrons in the substance into two energy groups: a high-energy
group with their spins aligned antiparallel to the magnetic vector of the
electrical field, and a low-energy group aligned parallel to the direction of
the magnetic field. Thus, the charge-transfer complex possesses all the
prior conditions needed to trigger an ESR absorption effect if electro-
magnetic energy of appropriate frequency is passed through the system.
We speculate that in the synapse this is exactly what happens: An electro-
magnetic wave of the correct resonance frequency is produced through a
coupled electromechanical oscillation of the receptor and becomes modu-
lated by absorption at certain frequencies. We propose that intercalation
of the neurotransmitter causes this oscillation, as well as the formation of
the charge-transfer complex; the rapid bonding and debonding of the in-
tercalator causes rapid changes in torsion of the helix, giving rise to oscil-
lation. Since this oscillation takes place in the electrical field present at the
synapse, it possesses an electromagnetic component.

The interaction between the nucleic acid receptor and its intercalators
could thus act as a self-contained ESR circuit: with charge transfer, on the
one hand, to provide the magnetic field necessary to polarize the free elec-
trons; and rapid oscillation in an electrical field, on the other hand, to
generate the absorption effect that characterizes ESR. This absorption ef-
fect will take place only at certain frequencies, namely, those frequencies
corresponding to the energy difference between the two magnetically
aligned groups of electrons in the nucleic acid receptor; selective absorp-
tion at these frequencies could informationally modulate the wave.

The electromagnetic waves currently used in ESR spectrometry are
radar frequencies ranging from 9,000 Mc/s to 36,000 Mc/s, which corre-
spond to wavelengths between 3.2 cm and 8 mm. The corresponding mag-
netic field strengths range from 3,300 to 13,000 gauss. According to Ingram
(1969), however, ESR absorption effects can be manifested using radio fre-
quencies as low as 28 Mc/s in magnetic fields of 10 gauss. Szent-Gyorgyi
(1960) has stated that free radicals show an ESR absorption effect in mag-
netic fields from 10 to 50 gauss. It is not clear whether macromolecular

oscillation could generate the frequencies required to trigger the energy ab-
sorption that characterizes the ESR signal. An experimental approach to
this model might investigate this question. To our knowledge, the possibil-
ity that macromolecular substrates oscillating in an electrical field may be
capable of electromagnetic emissions at radar or shortwave-radio frequen-
cies has not yet been investigated. It is possible that very much lower field
strengths and frequencies would suffice to produce ESR effects in single
macromolecules. Until experimental data is forthcoming this hypothesis
must, of course, remain hypothesis.

Given, for the sake of the argument, the assumptions that (1) an elec-
tromagnetic wave of appropriate frequency is generated in the manner
postulated, and that (2) this wave is modulated through absorption by
charge-transfer complexes, the model still must address two questions.
The first one is, through what mechanism could the organism detect the
modulated carrier-wave? Second, what sort of information could be car-
ried by the wave?

We can suggest an answer to the first question by referring to the stud-
ies, cited earlier, that show that the pineal gland is sensitive to sound,
photic stimuli, temperature, and X rays. We suggest that the pineal could
also function as a transducer for the detection of ESR in a feedback-type
mechanism; the pineal could act as an antenna by detecting a modulated
electromagnetic carrier-wave and converting it to a modulated spatiotem-
poral pattern of nerve impulses, much as a radio converts electromagnetic
waves to sound. In this way the information carried by the signal would
be reflected by modulated firing in populations of synapses; this modu-
lated firing would in turn give rise to further modulated ESR signals
(since the signal arises from processes involved in synaptic transmission),
which would then trigger further modulated neural patterns. In this way
this feedback mechanism could give rise to self-propagating, evolving
neural processes that we experience as thought, memory, or perception. It
is also conceivable that the pineal may be receptive to the ESR signals of
other organisms as well as those of its owner. Thus, it could act as a recep-
tor for the ESR strum of the biotic community and function to effec-
tively integrate an organism into its ecology.

The question of the kind of information that the signal would carry is
more difficult to answer. If the signal is generated by electromechanical
oscillation of the receptor, which then becomes modulated by ESR ab-
sorption, then the signal should reflect the internal electronic state of the
receptor, which in turn will reflect conformational changes taking place
from instant to instant in the macromolecule. We postulate that these

changes in helical torsion and tertiary topology are not merely random
fluctuations but are correlated with internal and external inputs, and,
thus, model perceptions, thoughts, and memories. Is it possible that
overlapping ESRs arising from macromolecular changes occurring at
many synapses could take the form of highly structured (perhaps helical)
standing waveforms? Such waveforms can be viewed as spatiotemporal
crystals having a vibratory structure (cf. Abraham 1972). Just this sort of
spatiotemporal structure constitutes a holographic image, and we have
noted in the previous chapter that holography seems analogous to mind
in many respects.

Support for our contention that experience can somehow induce
changes in macromolecules can be found in current theoretical models of
learning and memory. These models are based on the concept that the
storage of memory and learned behavior is mediated by changes in RNA
and proteins present in the neurons. Findings showing a rise in RNA and
protein synthesis following learning have furnished support for these
models (Hyden 1968, p. 88). Hyden (1968) has proposed the following
model for memory storage, which rests on the notion that conformational
changes of macromolecules in an electrical field could be significant:

I would like to suggest that the redundancy of the gene products
provides a basis for the necessary richness of proteins serving as
a mechanism for the storage of memories. Learning and experi-
ence lead to a further differentiation of brain cells. Additional
gene areas become active under the influence of environmental
factors. This leads to a synthesis of a greater number of RNA
species and proteins slightly differing from each other. The
detailed mechanism which gives rise to these events may be the
following. The external factors give rise to firing at modulated
frequencies in the sensory ganglia and brain stem areas, including
the limbic area. The modulated frequencies can split into a quad-
rature component and a vector component. I suggest that the 90
degree vector has a phase shift relative to the quadrature compo-
nent. The two variables, the frequency and the phase shift, impart
a high information content to such an electrical pattern, which
may be decisive for the specificity of its effect. In principle, this
effect consists in the production of a change in the ionic equilib-
rium through field changes. In the nuclear compartment these
field changes give rise to conformational changes: activating

enzyme proteins which in turn induce synthesis of RNA from
new areas. (p. 97)

The possibility that neurotransmitters might induce conformational
changes in macromolecules is shown by the following passage:

Elkes drew attention to an older hypothesis concerning the pur-
ported action of 5HT on the motility of glia. While the evidence
for this effect was tenuous, he felt strongly that the existence of
contractile elements in the central nervous system areas should be
seriously considered. These contractions might involve anything
from the folding and coiling of an ordered polymer, forming part
of a lipoprotein or mucoprotein lattice at a junctional site, to a
visible contraction recognizable by light microscopy. He pro-
posed the term micromechanical for such phenomena and won-
dered whether the so-called neurohumoral substances could not
play a regulatory role in the specificity of such phenomena. The
well-known sensitivity of contractile tissues to agents such as 5HT
(or ACh, or NE) might be extreme examples of a deeper and more
generalized biological effect at a micellar level. . . (Smythies, in
Schmitt et al. 1971, pp. 25-26)

It must be conceded that these tentative models for learning and mem-
ory are concerned with neural functions far from those presumed to be in-
volved with the interaction of serotonin or an analogous hallucinogen
with its receptor site. However, the fact that the hallucinogenically in-
duced state represents a novel learning experience and at times results in
an alteration in behavior patterns indicates that the processes effected by
hallucinogens (synaptic transmission) may indeed have some influence on
learning and memory mechanisms. Just such a possibility has been sug-
gested by Kety (1968). It seems that the question must remain unresolved
at present, since the significance of macromolecular changes occurring in
neurotransmission and memory storage is not well understood. The infor-
mation we have cited, however, does seem to indicate that such changes
may function in both the processing and the storage of neural input.

One question that has not yet been considered and that unfortunately
has been discussed only very sparingly in the literature is that of whether
neural DNA, as well as RNA, could be involved in neurotransmission or
memory mechanisms, and of what possible function it might have. The
following observation with regard to DNA is suggestive:

The nerve cells share a rare characteristic with a few other cells of
the organism. They do not divide. Over the life-cycle, therefore,
orderliness is not maintained by means of cell division. There will
be an increasing danger of errors at synthesis in the cells, which
means error in function. Evidence has been presented that neu-
rons may renew their DNA without preparing for division (Pelc
1964). Future studies will have to elucidate what happens in aging
neurons, since hybridization analyses have suggested that DNA
from an old animal may not be identical with DNA from a young
animal (Hahn 1966).

. . . We have, therefore, as a first step, prepared brain DNA of
varying degrees of purity. This DNA was injected into the ven-
tricles of the brain of other animals of the same species. In one
hour, protein synthesis was found to increase significantly. Bio-
chemical analyses showed that the DNA had been incorporated in
the recipient's brain cells in a polymerized state . . . (H. Hyden, in
Koestler and Smythies 1969, p. 102)

It may be relevant to mention here the commonplace within the disci-
pline of genetics—that only 2 to 5 percent of the genome is active at any
one time, that these inactive areas can be activated by external (i.e., extra-
cellular) factors such as hormones, and that large populations of similar
nucleotide sequences exist in the DNA complements of higher organisms.
It is possible to speculate on a memory mechanism, based on an interac-
tion of intercalating amines and neural DNA, that would function on
principles similar to the intercalator/RNA interaction that may be in-
volved in neural transmission. The remainder of this chapter is concerned
with a discussion of such a speculation.

For the sake of hypothesis, let us suppose that serotonin and its analogs
interact with RNA at the receptor site, much in the manner postulated by
Smythies, the question of the effect this could have on ESR being mo-
mentarily disregarded. We have seen from Smythies's model that seroton-
in intercalating into the RNA could cause a separation of the nucleotide
strands and thus open an ionic shutter facilitating the passage of
charged ions, and perhaps biogenic amines themselves, through the mem-
brane. The preceding evidence cited indicates that injected DNA can be-
come incorporated and polymerized in brain cells; therefore, nucleotides
must be able to cross the neural membrane and also the nuclear mem-
brane. Conventional intracellular enzymes probably facilitate the crossing
of the nuclear membrane, but a mechanism facilitating outer membrane

passage is more difficult to imagine. It seems possible, however, that the
RNA shutter mechanism could allow the transport of small molecules,
such as neurotransmitters or nucleotides, across the postsynaptic mem-
brane. Once these molecules have penetrated the postsynaptic membrane
and entered the cytoplasm of the axon, they could be transported to the
vicinity of the nucleus by the mechanism of axoplasmic flow:

Evidently there is some highly organized transport mechanism. It
has long been known that nerve fibers are not just tubes filled
with some protein jelly, but that they contain many fine struc-
tures, neurofibrils and neurotubules that run along their length. It is
postulated by Ochs that after manufacture in the cell body the
macromolecules are loaded onto these tubules and fibrils and
travel along by some sliding mechanism, hence the uniform rate.
(Eccles 1973, p. 171)

Although studies of this chemical transport mechanism have focused
on the transport of macromolecules from the nucleus in the cell body to
the synapse via the axon, Eccles goes on to state that reverse transport,
from the axon to the cell body, does take place.

Could it be that neurotransmitters that penetrate in this manner be-
come intercalated into the nuclear DNA of the neuron? This would seem
to be at least a possibility and would appear to be a function of the ability
of the amine to cross the membrane; that is, those amines would be se-
lected for intercalation by (1) their ability to cross the membrane and (2)
their capacity for intercalation. Thus, while certain amines present at the
receptor site (e.g., serotonin) might intercalate into the RNA and open the
shutter, others might penetrate to the nucleus via the channel thus
formed and intercalate into the DNA. This postulated intercalation might
have two alternative effects. The intercalators might initiate separation of
the nucleotide strands through charge transfer, and thus function as induc-
tors for RNA synthesis. Alternatively, if the bound intercalators had the ef-
fect of stabilizing the helix in the manner of proflavin, rather than
separating it, then it would seem that those portions of DNA involved in
intercalation would be unavailable for transcription. These portions, then,
would constitute the closed areas of the neural genome, which subsequent
molecular events could render open to synthesis. This suggests one possi-
ble mechanism by which the base sequence of neural DNA could be al-
tered without necessitating an actual change of structure; that is, given
one situation in which amines are intercalated at particular sites on the

DNA, then subsequently these amines could debond from some of these
sites and bond into different sites, thus coding a memory or learned
behavior and simultaneously rendering formerly silent areas of the
genome available for transcription and silencing formerly active areas.
This would seem to amount to about the same effect as a restructuring of
base sequences but has the advantage of not requiring an actual change in
neural DNA.

On the other hand, if an ESR readout mechanism, such as that dis-
cussed previously, plays a role in making molecularly encoded information
available to consciousness, an intercalation into neural DNA-inducing
charge transfer would then render the intercalated portions open to per-
ception via ESR. Subsequent debonding and rebonding of the amines to
different sites would be reflected in a changed ESR signal. The RNA
would also, of course, be expected to exhibit a change in its ESR, which
would reflect the change in its structure initiated by the opening to tran-
scription of hitherto blocked DNA sequences.

Clearly, problems are involved with experimental approaches to this
model. One of the most difficult is the question of determining which
amines bond at which sites. For instance, does serotonin bond into both
RNA at the membrane and DNA at the nucleus, or one or the other? This
amounts to asking, are certain amines specific intercalators for RNA,
while others are specific for DNA? Or, can several species of amine bond
into both sites? How might these alternatives be reflected in ESR if such a
mechanism operates in the organism? At present, the only approaches to
some of these questions are speculative.

We have chosen to present one such speculation. As noted in the dis-
cussion of bonding sites for indoles to nucleic acids, some compounds
appear to bind better to DNA than to RNA. One such compound is
harmine, and its affinity for DNA is not surprising in view of its previously
mentioned similarity to proflavin. It is possible, therefore, that harmine or
one of its analogs, such as 6-methoxytetrahydroharman, would exhibit a
superior capability to bond to DNA if it were enabled to cross the mem-
brane. Perhaps in the normal organism, the DNA is unintercalated by any
compounds, or perhaps serotonin is the normal intercalator. When a hal-
lucinogen such as harmine or LSD is introduced into the system, either
from an endogenous source or from the external environment, it may
show a greater affinity for the DNA than serotonin and bond in place of it;
a stronger charge-transfer reaction may result and may produce an ampli-
fied ESR signal, facilitating greater access to stored memories and subcon-
scious contents. Thus, a population using harmine or similar compounds

in shamanic and religious practices, or an organism capable of synthesizing
such highly reactive compounds internally, might well be afforded a tre-
mendous evolutionary advantage, as it would possess an enhanced access to
the informational gestalten of its own holographic genetic storage system.

It is also conceivable that the bonding of harmine or an analogous
compound into DNA could form permanent bonds maintained by a
form of superconductivity and, thus, function in the formation and main-
tenance of long-term memory. We have seen that compounds such as
proflavin and presumably harmine have the effect of stabilizing the helix
through strong pi-cloud overlap. Superconductivity could maintain such
bonds indefinitely and thus ensure the longevity of long-term memory
storage; it could also be involved as a mechanism for producing highly
amplified ESRs from molecular substrates. The contents of long-term
memories thus encoded could perhaps be selectively recalled by proper
modulation of the ESR signal, by either reinforcing it or canceling it; this
may be accomplished by the formation of RNA-indole complexes with
ESRs in phase with the particular DNA ESR. The question of whether
superconductivity may play a role in living processes deserves further in-
vestigation. Many of the ordering principles of living systems do seem to
have many similarities to low-temperature systems (cf. Little 1965).

Naturally, the hypothetical model presented possesses its own peculiar
problems in terms of experimental approaches, and any definitive confir-
mation or disconfirmation of the model would seem to depend on the
development of very much more sophisticated biochemical and ESR
techniques. We felt, however, that at least parts of the theory presented
could be subjected to an operational test. The experimental procedures
involved in this test, and the at least partially affirmative results obtained,
are the subject matter of the next chapter.

Our rather freewheeling series of speculations on the molecular
processes that may form the physical basis of mind is concluded at this
point. We have postulated that internal and external inputs may be corre-
lated to macromolecular changes and quantum-mechanical events that
form the physical basis of mind. To say they are the physical basis of
mind, however, is not to equate them to mind; this is the error of reduc-
tionism. The quantum-mechanical mechanisms we have discussed may
have some properties homologous to the properties of mind as we experi-
ence it. However, mind is probably an expression of laws operating on a
hierarchical level superordinate to that represented by organisms; hence,
it is to be expected that it will exemplify some properties not to be found
at the level of organisms alone. These are properties transcending the

boundary conditions of organism and are those properties that make
mind irreducible to physical or even organic structure. It is probable that
the properties peculiar to mind introduce additional boundary conditions
on subordinate levels, the organismic, molecular, and submolecular, so
that the physical basis of mind—whatever it may be—has certain of its
qualities determined by mind. If ESR forms the physical basis of mind, it
probably possesses unique qualities that we would not find in the phe-
nomenon as it is observed in the laboratory. But this relationship can
never be reciprocal: Mind may determine some additional properties of
ESR or whatever physical process operates at the interface of molecules
and mind, but molecules and physical process, however complex, can
never, by themselves, determine mind.

Chapter 6

An Experiment at La Chorrera

During the course of our investigation of the shamanic dimension, our at-
tention was drawn to a report of ayahuasca usage among the Jivaro (Harner
1968); the shamans, under the influence of potent monoamine oxidase-
inhibiting, harmine- and tryptamine-containing Banisteriopsis infusions,
are said to produce a fluorescent violet substance by means of which they
accomplish all their magic. Though invisible to ordinary perception, this
fluid is said to be visible to anyone who has ingested the infusion.
Ayahuasca is frequently associated with violet auras and deep blue halluci-
nations; this suggests that ayahuasca may enable one to see at ultraviolet
wavelengths, and that this substance may be visible only in the ultraviolet
part of the spectrum. We also had occasion to ingest synthetic tryptamines
and had observed as a regular feature of the tryptamine intoxication a pe-
culiar audile phenomenon. This is a very faint, but definitely perceivable,
harmonic overtone of varying pitch and frequency that seems to emanate
from inside the skull while one is under the influence of tryptamines; the
exact nature of this harmonic tone eludes precise verbal description, as it
varies in quality and amplitude during the course of the tryptamine experi-
ence, first manifesting itself as an extremely faint sound on the very edge of
audibility, rather akin to the sound that might proceed from distant wind
chimes. This sound gradually increases in volume a very few minutes after
it is perceived, taking on an electric, buzzing quality that might be com-
pared in some respects to whistling wind or running water. Understand-
ably, one might be inclined to classify this sound as merely an audile
hallucination induced by the psychoactive agent, were it not for the fact
that it exhibits several specific and regularly noticeable features that would
seem to set it apart from the class of hallucinated auditory phenomena,
sometimes reported in literature dealing with psychedelics. One such fea-
ture is the specific association of this phenomenon with the ingestion of
hallucinogens with structures close to tryptamine, that is, the psilocybin-
DMT compounds and the harmine-tetrahydroharmine complex found in
Banisteriopsis caapi and B. rusbyana. The reports of similar phenomena
being noted for mescaline or the lysergamides are rare; while, according to
Naranjo (in Efron et al. 1967, p. 389), approximately 50 percent of the sub-
jects under the influence of ayahuasca (B. caapi) commonly experience an
extremely loud buzzing sound, emanating from the interior of the skull,

during the course of the experience. Individual reports of the subjectively
perceived phenomenon exhibit a high degree of similarity.

Our desire to pursue the investigation of this audile phenomenon at
greater depth, combined with the curiosity and incredulity that Harner's
report had aroused, led us to travel, in March of 1971, to the tiny mission
settlement of La Chorrera, forty-three minutes south, seventy-three de-
grees west, on the banks of the Rio Igara-parana in Comisaria Amazonas,
Colombia. We felt that here we could carry out firsthand observations
into the phenomenology of the tryptamine dimension. This region is well
represented in endemic species of tryptamine-bearing psychoactive plants,
among them Virola theiodora and other Virola species, Psychotria viridis,
Banisteriopsis caapi (fig. 12) and B. rusbyana, and a lowland variety of
Stropharia cubensis mushrooms (fig. 13) that we found to be particularly
rich in phosphorylated tryptamines. Other minor psychoactive agents
were also in widespread aboriginal use in this area, tobacco and coca
being the most important in this respect, but these played no part in our
experiments.

Ingestion of Stropharia cubensis, on a number of separate occasions,
showed it to be of low toxicity and very nearly ideal for easy manifestation
of the interior cerebral tone. We speculated that the tone is directly caused
by the metabolism of the tryptamines within the cerebral matrix and
might be the electron spin resonance of the metabolizing tryptamine mol-
ecules within the nervous system, somehow amplified to audible levels. We
discovered that it was possible to closely imitate these tones with the voice
by sounding harmonic vocal tones that quickly adjusted to the interior
sounds as they moved from the audible into the ultrasonic range. Using
this knowledge, it was possible to produce a vocal sound that seemed to
amplify the harmonic tones perceivable inside the cranium. The vocal pro-
duction of the sounds seems to rest on specific effects of the tryptamines
on the motor nerves, particularly those governing the facial and vocal mus-
cles. As with ayahuasca, an interior sound is commonly heard, which quite
often triggers a spontaneous burst of imitative vocalizings, markedly unlike
any conventional human speech or facial contortions. The tryptamines
can apparently trigger a kind of rippling of facial muscles, which results in
the production of a vocally modulated pressure wave.

What is more startling is that the sound, which gains in energy the
longer it is sustained, can actually become visible—as if the vibrational
wave patterns were shifting into the visible spectrum or inducing a vibra-
tional excitation of the air in such a way as to affect light diffraction.
These observations suggested that although the wave is produced with

FIGURE 13

Stropharia cubensis (Earle) played a major role in the experiment at La Chorrera.
These mushrooms grow gregariously on cow dung of the common species of
Indian humped cattle (Bos indicus) and in this author's experience rarely occur in
any other situation. The original type was discovered in Cuba in June of 1904.
Stropharia cubensis has been reported from Florida, Puerto Rico, Oaxaca, British
Honduras, Trinidad, Colombia, Bolivia, Argentina, and Indochina. The major
psychoactive constituent has been identified by Hofmann et al. (1959) as psilocy-
bin, that is, 4-phosphoryloxy-N, N-dimethyltryptamine. Illustration from Les
champions hallucinogenes du Mexique by Roger Heim and R. Gordon Wasson, in
Archives du Museum National d'Histoire Naturelle, 7e serie, tome 6, 1958. (Edi-
tions du Museum National d'Histoire Naturelle, 38 rue Geoffroy-Saint-Hilaire,
75005 Paris)

sound, it may possess an electromagnetic component. This peculiar wave
phenomenon will continue to be generated out of the mouth and nostrils
and will be visible in the surrounding air as long as the vocalizations are
continued. Working from the hypothesis that this visible phenomenon
might somehow proceed from the interior harmonic tones made audible
through the ingestion of tryptamines, and further speculating that these
tones might be caused by the electron spin resonance of the metabolizing
tryptamines within the nervous system, our task became one of attempt-
ing to determine how vocally imitating molecular ESR could produce a
visible standing wave and, further, of attempting to describe just what this
wave might be in physical terms.

The temporal process of metabolism leads in the human brain to a spe-
cial kind of phenomenon, which is thought, and the nature and texture of
this thought is affected and altered in relation to what specific metabolic
processes are occurring within the brain. For instance, the physicochemi-
cal state of the brain during stage IV sleep is different than when drugs are
cycling in the brain, and each of these metabolic states has its special,
unique form of consciousness attributed to it. It is no longer tenable to re-
gard these processes of consciousness merely as an epiphenomenal reflec-
tion of the metabolic processes occurring simultaneously within the brain.
It has been found (cf. Dicara 1970; Green et al. 1970) that this process is a
two-way exchange: Metabolism gives rise to special kinds of potentiated
energy states within an organism, but these energy states reflect and, in
some degree, determine what kinds of metabolic processes will occur.

It is not easy to know to what degree metabolic process is determinable
by consciousness. To assert that thought can control chemical reactions in
the nervous system may seem peculiar on the surface, but it is inherently
no less peculiar to say that it cannot intrude on the external world as a
causal force. Clearly, thought does have causal effect; reality, as we per-
ceive it, is largely shaped by the artifacts, both material and symbolic, of
thought. Therefore, that thought can have no direct influence on the
physical texture of reality is perhaps an unjustifiable assumption, for such
an assumption implies that one has prior knowledge as to the boundary
conditions of the interface of mind and the world. The question must re-
main an open one. We are reminded of Whitehead's observation that elec-
trons blindly run either within or without the body, but within the body
they blindly run according to the conditions of the body, and thought is
among these conditions. The position that thought does in fact exert
some influence over quantum events was included in our repertoire of op-
erational constructs.

The brain is an extremely complex matrix of electrochemical circuitry
that reacts peculiarly in the presence of certain kinds of tryptamines (but
requires other tryptamines, such as serotonin, to function normally). The
bizarre mental phenomena caused by tryptamines are probably related to a
disturbance of normal tryptamine metabolism. It is clear that the purely
chemical interaction between drug and brain occurs within the cerebral
matrix. The mind, however, can be viewed as the temporal overstructure
of the brain, which manifests, through time, in processes such as menta-
tion, memory, and dreams. By affecting the temporal process of metabo-
lism in the neural matrix, psychedelic drugs affect, as well, changes in its
temporal overstructure, that is, mind. This suggests that psychoactive mol-
ecules may also possess a temporal aspect, which only manifests in their
metabolic cycling. A static molecular diagram is essentially a misleading
concept, for it can show only the physical configuration of a particular
molecule. In fact, that molecule, as it functions in nature, is but one stage
or structural configuration in the metabolic processes occurring within the
living tissues of all organisms. We felt that this relationship was a reciprocal
one, and that mind, through a conscious intervention into temporal pro-
cess, could determine the outcome of certain events on the metabolic level.

This understanding of the mechanics of metabolism was combined
with the notion that the sound that manifests inside the brain under the
influence of tryptamines originated from the ESR created by the process of
their intercalating into the neural DNA. We reasoned that it would be pos-
sible to trigger specific chemical reactions with the voice by harmonically
manipulating the ESR energies and thus the charge-transfer process that
causes this resonation in the molecule. The concept, as it relates to molecu-
lar electron spin resonations, can be explained more simply in terms of a
vibrating string, where it was first discovered as the principle of overtonal
harmonics. Suppose an open string A is sounded on the cello; the string
sounds not only the fundamental but also a series of higher notes that are
integral multiples, as defined by the speed of vibration of the fundamental
one, the most important being an octave, a fifth, and a fourth apart. If the
vibrating string is then touched very lightly, the fundamental note will be
canceled and will sympathetically cancel the subsidiary harmonies above it,
to the degree that they are harmonically close to the fundamental note.

Our reasoning regarding the ESR of tryptamines was based on a similar
idea. The psilocybin complex, the methylated tryptamines, and the har-
mine complex are all biosynthetically derived in nature from tryptophan
through a progressive cyclizing of the side-chain (cf. fig. 14). It seemed
reasonable, therefore, to assume that this biosynthetic relationship is

figure 14 Structures of Hallucinogens Related to Tryptophan

Psilocin, the dephosphorylated derivative of psilocybin, is shown here in its relation to tryptamine. Note that N, N-dimethyltryptamine is
closely related to psilocin. That tryptophan is a precursor of psilocybin in living organisms has been shown by Brack et al. (1961). Psilocybin
and trace amounts of psilocin have been extracted from Stropharia cubensisby Hofmann et al.

reflected in their ESR as well, and that their absorption frequencies would
be harmonic overtones of each other. If the ESR modulation of the tryp-
tamines can be heard by ingesting the mushroom, and if this modulation
can be amplified with sound, it will be absorbed at a higher frequency by
the harmine complexes if these are also being metabolized within the sys-
tem. This should cancel the charge transfer of the metabolizing harmine,
causing it to momentarily lose its electrical resistance and behave as a su-
perconductor. Similarly, if the modulated harmine ESR is amplified with
vocal harmonics, it should be absorbed at the tryptamine frequencies and
cancel the tryptamine charge transfer.

The motif and usage of ayahuasca in aboriginal shamanism correlates
well with the premise that harmine-type compounds afford access to gen-
etically grounded, archetypal information. The configuration of the har-
mine structure is ideally suited to act as a DNA intercalator. We have long
speculated that the action of such compounds is due to a kind of genetic
readout of molecularly coded information, which results from the harmine
intercalating into the genetic material of the cerebral neurons. What has
heretofore eluded explanation is the precise mechanism by which the
bonding between the harmine alkaloids and the DNA-RNA matrix can
take place and how, once this bond has been effected, the genetic readout
can be detected by the higher cortical perceptions in the form of a psychic
experience. If our theory concerning the induction of superconducting
configuration within these molecules via ESR harmonics was found to be
correct, this problem would be very nearly solved, for a molecule possess-
ing zero electrical resistance would be able to sustain strong charge transfer
with other superconducting molecules indefinitely. The harmine becomes
superconductive only for a microsecond but then is sustained in its super-
conductivity through the fact of its having entered a bond state with the
superconducting core of DNA. We speculate that superconductivity plays
a role in the mechanism preserving the genetic message from disruption.
That DNA might utilize superconductivity, or something similar, is an old
idea, but it has never been demonstrated (cf. Little 1965). We suggest this
may be because it is a quality of in vivo material, and that it is a systems
property that vanishes when the genetic material is disrupted. In What Is
Life? (1944), Schrodinger, anticipating the discovery of DNA, wrote:

... to reconcile the high durability of the hereditary substance
with its minute size, we had to evade the tendency to disorder by
inventing the molecule, in fact, an unusually large molecule
which has to be a masterpiece of highly differentiated order,

safeguarded by the conjuring rod of quantum theory. The laws of
chance are not invalidated by this invention, but their outcome
is modified. The physicist is familiar with the fact that the classical
laws of physics are modified by quantum theory, especially at low
temperature. There are many instances of this. Life seems to be
one of them, a particularly striking one. Life seems to be orderly
and lawful behavior of matter, not based exclusively on its ten-
dency to go over from order to disorder, but based partly on exist-
ing order that is kept up.

To the physicist—but only to him—I could hope to make my
view clearer by saying: The living organism seems to be a macro-
scopic system which in part of its behavior approaches to that
purely mechanical (as contrasted with thermodynamical) conduct
to which all systems tend, as the temperature approaches to the
absolute zero and the molecular disorder is removed. (p. 69)

We speculated that information stored in the neural-genetic material
might be made available to consciousness through a modulated ESR ab-
sorption phenomenon, originating in superconducting charge-transfer
complexes formed by intercalation of tryptamines and beta-carbolines
into the genetic material. We reasoned that both neural DNA and neural
RNA were involved in this process: Serotonin or, in the case of our exper-
iment, exogenously introduced methylated tryptamines would preferen-
tially bind to membrane RNA, opening the ionic shutter mechanism and,
simultaneously, entering into superconductive charge transfer with its re-
sulting modulated ESR signal; beta-carbolines could then pass through
the membrane via the RNA-ionic channel and intercalate into the neural
DNA. The DNA-harmine complex would possess an ESR modulated at
frequencies that were harmonic overtones of the ESR absorption frequen-
cies of the RNA-tryptamine complex. The frequencies of either complex
could then be harmonically amplified or canceled by modulation of the
other complex.

To check our theories, we devised an experiment that was planned to
trigger an intercalation of harmine into the genetic material that would
sustain and stabilize its charge-transfer energy within a superconducting
matrix. We reasoned that an infusion of ayahuasca plus tryptamine (mush-
room) admixtures would allow us to do the following: (1) We would hear
and vocally imitate the ESR modulation of the tryptamines as they inter-
calated with their RNA receptors. (2) The amplified tryptamine-RNA

ESR would be a harmonic overtone of the harmine-DNA resonation
frequency, and the vocal modulation of these frequencies would cancel the
two waveforms, causing both complexes to simultaneously lose their
electrical resistance and assume superconducting configuration. (3) The
electrically canceled harmine compound, which had been locked into
superconductive bond with the DNA, would then begin to broadcast its
waveform hologramatic ESR configuration through the superconducting
harmine-transducing circuit. This superconductively sustained and ampli-
fied resonation of the harmine-DNA macromolecule would excite the
tryptamine-RNA complex into a sympathetic resonance frequency, caus-
ing it to act as a radio transmitter, which would broadcast the coded infor-
mation of the harmine-DNA superconducting sustainer circuit.

The modulated and superconductively sustained ESR of this macro-
molecule might eventually manifest itself as a standing waveform that
would, in effect, be a waveform hologram of the entire resonating macro-
molecule. Such a molecule would be a superconductive holographic infor-
mation storage system, containing all genetically and experientially coded
information within its waveform pattern. It would respond to thought,
which would be an interference pattern set up by resonating tryptamine-
RNA complexes. Where the ESR set up in the cerebral tryptamine-RNA
complex was in phase shift with the harmine-DNA matrix, a standing
waveform would be created in three-dimensional space, which would be a
hologram of an idea. Conceiving an idea would create a specific waveform
pattern of tryptamine-RNA resonation; where this resonated sympathet-
ically on the superconducting DNA-harmine macromolecule, that part
of the molecular chain would be beheld holographically as a three-
dimensional image. What is described can be considered a solid-state
cybernetic circuit, macromolecular in size and sustained by superconduc-
tive charge transfer. As any other solid-state circuit, the material matrix
would be static, and the kinetic electrical activity would be the mobile
element. The components of such a system would have a fourfold arrange-
ment. The superconductive harmine-DNA complex would function as a
charge-transfer power source and holographic ESR readout mechanism
for informational gestalten stored in the in vivo DNA. The superconduct-
ing tryptamine-RNA complex would function as a mentally triggered
switch, governing the activation of the genetic readout mechanism and
monitoring the input of modulated ESR frequencies from the environ-
ment. The total system would be a holo-cybernetic unit of superconduc-
tive genetic material in which the entirety of the DNA memory bank

would be at the command of the harmine readout mechanism, activated
via tryptamine harmonic interference. The tryptamine-RNA complex,
besides activating the DNA-harmine readout mechanism, could function
as an omnidirectional receiver for externally modulated ESR frequencies.

If we imagine the harmine-DNA complex as a radio-cybernetic matrix,
then we can suppose that this matrix stores information in a regressing hi-
erarchy of interiorized reflections of itself, in a form similar to the familiar
Chinese ivory balls carved one within another, each level free to rotate
independently. In response to the vibration of tryptamine-RNA charge-
transfer exchanges, modulated by mind into a usable signal, information
searches of any sort might be conducted through a process that we suggest
might be much like the principle of retrieval of information from volume
holograms. Such a process of information retrieval and image projection
would never lag behind human thought. Indeed, conscious thought may
be precisely this process, but occurring on a more limited scale. This limi-
tation of scale may arise out of the way in which serotonin (5HT) reflects
the ESR of the genetic material into which this neurotransmitter is con-
tinually intercalating during normal metabolism. What we are suggesting
on one level is that how conscious an organism is of the world that sur-
rounds it may be fundamentally related to the charge-transfer capacity of
the endogenous DNA and RNA intercalators that the organism has
evolved. Serotonin may be one of many possible resonant transmitters of
the informational hologram that is stored in DNA. Harmine, we suggest,
may be another, and perhaps more efficient, transmitter. Harmine may be
more efficient precisely because it bonds more readily to DNA than to
RNA. The rise in levels of beta-carbolines seen in pineal glands as one as-
cends the primate phylogeny—with the highest levels occurring in Homo
sapiens—lends credence to the idea that the adaptation called conscious-
ness may involve mutation of the metabolic pathways associated with
serotonin, other tryptamines, and harmine. The shift of emphasis from
serotonin pathways to beta-carboline and methylated tryptamine path-
ways is, we speculate, the molecular evolutionary event that is responsible
for the intimations of transfiguration that have recently characterized
mass consciousness.

It is easy to see that the actualization of a functioning system of the
type described, when coupled with a controlling intellect, would be, in ef-
fect, a hyperdimensionally mobile cybernetic entity. It would be the prac-
tical equivalent of a transdimensional vehicle in that it would, in common
with holographic imagery, actualize the Hermetic axiom that What is

here is everywhere, what is not here is nowhere. It would be comparable
to a flying saucer that moved through time and space, not in any conven-
tional sense but rather one that is all time and space, warped through a
higher topology into the boundaries of conventional space-time. This is
similar to Jung's understanding of the psyche and is the effect that this
holo-cybernetic matrix would tend to create. If, in fact, neural DNA is the
repository of information, as we postulate, then the system described
would render the totality of this information available to consciousness
and might include all personal memories and experiences and also all col-
lective knowledge and experience, accumulated over the evolutionary
(and possibly cultural) history of the species and reflected in its genetic
makeup. Such a system would contain thousands of times the capabilities
of enormous cybernetic systems in the space of a superconducting sus-
tainer matrix only a few microns in diameter.

Success in the formation of a permanent DNA-harmine bond and the
resulting permanently sustained charge-transfer process could be expected
to trigger a metabolic and experiential situation with similarities to both
toxic psychosis caused by abnormal tryptophan metabolism and the sha-
manic trance attendant upon prolonged ingestion of ayahuasca (B. caapi)
and ayahuasca admixtures. In each of these situations, experimental tryp-
tophan psychosis and shamanic trance, what is involved are alterations
and inhibitions of normal amine levels in the brain. The shaman manipu-
lates this bizarre region for culturally valid reasons and with techniques of
proven efficacy. The schizophrenic is an unwilling victim, a traveler
through what to him is a terrifying landscape. Using analytical premises
and the operational constructs described above, we sought to carry our-
selves, as modern humans, into the same numinous landscape and to offer
a report of interest to empirical investigators.

Chapter 7

Psychological Reflections on La Chorrera

With chapter 6 as a basis, we approach the most difficult aspect of the La
Chorrera experiment that we are called upon to discuss, the subjective
psychological contents. Here is an area where we must exercise objectivity
in discussing personal situations. Because we experienced what is de-
scribed in this chapter, we are acutely aware of its strangeness and its in-
credibility. But psychology is a young science, and the neat separation of
experiment and experimenter, which characterizes the physical sciences,
will become an impediment to the progress of experimental psychology if
taken too seriously. We would feel that we were not being completely
honest and thus not as scientific as possible if we did not share with the
reader the nature of the situation in which these ideas were generated.
Memory will necessarily play a major part in any account of a process hav-
ing temporal duration, but what a reconstructed memory fails to correctly
represent is the formation of understanding as a gradual reaching out or
groping that is, itself, a process proceeding through time. The experiment
caused a release of unconscious imagery related to several themes of an ar-
chetypal nature. The major theme was that of transformation.

Silverman (cf. above, Part One, chapter 2) has noted two types of schiz-
ophrenia under the heading of reactive, which he calls essential and
paranoid. His descriptions of the symptoms of these two types corre-
spond well to the varieties of unusual ideation we experienced as the
major confirmation of our success on the submolecular level in the two
weeks following the experiment of March 5,1971. From that date, the nor-
mal configurations of both our personalities started a sudden and imme-
diate migration toward these two forms of reactive schizophrenia. In the
early morning hours of March 5, shortly after the completion of the vocal
experiment outlined in chapter 6, in the space of scarcely more than an
hour, one of us entered a progressively more detached state of essential
schizophrenia or classic shamanic trance.

We could feel the presence of some invisible hyperspatial entity, an ally,
which seemed to be observing and sometimes exerting influence on the sit-
uation to keep us moving gently toward an experimental resolution of the
ideas we were generating. Because of the alien nature of the tryptamine
trance, its seeming accentuation of themes alien, insectile, and futuristic,
and because of previous experiences with tryptamine in which insectile
hallucinatory transformations of human beings were observed, we were led

to speculate that the role of the presence was somehow like that of an an-
thropologist, come to give humanity the keys to galactarian citizenship.
We discussed this entity in terms of a giant insect and, through the insect
trill of the Amazon jungle at midday, seemed able to discern a deeper har-
monic buzz that somehow signified the unseen outsider. This sense of the
presence of an alien third entity was sometimes very intense, most intense
in early March and from there fading off gradually.

For the next thirty-seven days, especially the next fourteen days, our
shared ideation consisted of, among other themes, but as a dominant one,
the idea of a shamanic journey of return from the ends of space and time
to the earth, with the collected energy configuration of space-time con-
densed into a kind of lens or saucer, a true philosopher's stone. One of us
experienced an intense transference state similar to reactive paranoid
schizophrenia and accepted the paternal and curative role of shaman and
psychopomp. From the sixth until the seventeenth of March, one of us
did not sleep, and the other, while awake, spoke continuously, in appar-
ent and convincing telepathic rapport with anyone he wished, in com-
mand of enormous technical erudition and a strange and rapidly evolving
hyperspatial cosmogony that, following a Manichean perception, visual-
ized the solar system as a huge light pump, wherein the light of souls is
pumped from planet to planet until it finally leaves the solar system alto-
gether and is transmitted to the galactic center.* Some of his discoveries
were that Jupiter is the reflected image of the earth in hyperspace, is teem-
ing with bizarre life-forms, and is somehow an essential key to unraveling
the species' fate. In his interior epic, late twentieth-century history was
experienced as a frantic effort to build an object, which he called the
lens, to allow life to escape to Jupiter on the heels of an impending
global catastrophe.

Slowly, as the shamanic voyager neared his home, his place in space, his
stitch in time, the myth making and the symptoms of election schizophre-
nia faded in each of us. However, the continuing process of understand-
ing, triggered by the experiment, did not cease. Rather, it continued to
stabilize and define itself with the passage of each twenty-four-hour cycle,
leading out of the crazy poetic ideation of the early days following the
experiment and into the understanding that has led us to hypothesize a
new model of mind and time. Our model is, first, an effort to trace the
logic of these experiences in terms relevant to the molecular levels where

[* For further discussion of the archetypal theme of return to the galactic center, the interested reader is
referred to Hamlet's Mill (de Santillana and von Dechend 1969), especially chapter 18.]

the experimental superconductive intercalation of harmine may have
taken place. The content of our experience has resolved itself into the log-
ical consequences that flow from the revealed axiom that all phenomena
are at root constellated by a waveform that is the hierarchical summation
of its constituent parts, morphogenetic patterns related to those in DNA.

Although we can clearly recognize that our experience evinces the clas-
sic symptomatology associated with the two generally distinguished cate-
gories of process schizophrenia, we are unable to make the assumption
that the experiment was therefore nothing but a simultaneous schizo-
phrenia (cf. chapter 2). Rather, we maintain that we are, in fact, dealing
with an objective phenomenon that, although of a highly peculiar nature,
inexorably bound up with psychic processes, does have its basis in the
molecular phenomena we were in the process of investigating. As empiri-
cal evidence for this view, we mention the following points that seem to
deviate from the usual schizophrenic episode: (1) The suddenness with
which the symptoms developed following our actual experiment; that is
to say, within a few minutes after we completed our preplanned experi-
mental procedures, we began to disengage from the continuum of collec-
tive perception and, at the same time, began to experience the expanded
channel capacity that we had predicted would be a part of the phenome-
nology to be manifested if we were successful in our attempt to generate a
superconducting genetic matrix harmine bond. (2) The simultaneous and
dovetail aspect of our disassociation, meaning that, although both of us
were exhibiting the symptoms of a type of schizophrenia, the ideas and
the understanding that we were experiencing was shared. In the same way
that a film running in reverse seems to present a spectacle of wild and irra-
tional confusion, yet manages in the end to have things in their proper
places, mentation and physical movement seemed to be simply the reverse
of logical expectations. (3) One of us experienced eleven days without
sleep and felt no strain during this same period.

More important than any of these factors (which are, after all, unique,
unverified, and unrepeatable events) indicating a condition beyond sim-
ple schizophrenia are the idea models we have created out of the careful
observation of the things that happened to us. It is upon this theory, and
not as reporters of paranormal events, that we wish to be judged.

We argue that the theory of the hyperspatial nature of superconductive
bonds, and the experiment we devised to test that theory, yielded not only
spectacular subjective results but also a modular wave-hierarchy theory of
the nature of time that we have been able to construe, using a particular
mathematical treatment of the / Ching, into a general theory of systems,

which illuminates the nature of time and organism and provides an idea
model that explains the interconnection of physical and psychological
phenomena from the submolecular to the macrocosmic level.

We cannot close these psychological reflections on our experiment
without a brief discussion of the nature of the subjective experience of the
hallucinogenic tryptamines that were our basic tools. To ingest Stropharia
cubensis is to erect a star antenna ; that is, by taking psychodynamic
tryptamines into one's system, one is better able to hear and perhaps to
see the standing wave of species' experience (as seems to be possible in
some dreams). The character of the mushroom experience is almost en-
tirely that of understanding.* We suggest that this understanding may be
the amplified appearance, at the level of a higher cortical experience, of
the DNA electron spin resonance. The Stropharia mushroom is an evi-
dently nontoxic and easily applied tool for intensifying the phenomenon
associated with gaining access to the atemporal unconscious. This case for
utilization is like much else about the mushroom that partakes of the
Siren's Song. In using the mushroom, one must be especially alert for
transference phenomena and ego identification with the contents of the
hyperactive imagination. It is not we who are doing anything; the self-
revelation of the phenomenon is something that is happening to us. Alter-
ation of monoamine oxidase (MAO) levels through the smoking of B.
caapi bark after ingesting mushrooms is the closest approximation to
smoking synthetic tryptamine (DMT) that we have found in nature. It is
quite possible that in the resin of Virola theiodora there are even more pro-
foundly active tryptamine and beta-carboline compounds. If some odd
form of toxicity within the mushroom had a role in our experiences, it
was not apparent in subsequent mushroom experiences.

It is possible that the schizophrenic episode which followed our experi-
ment may have resulted from an irreversible inhibition of MAO. Some
MAO inhibitors used therapeutically as antidepressants (notably iproni-
azid) can bind irreversibly to the enzyme, triggering a long-term inhibition
that can only be mitigated through the production of new enzymes by
protein synthesis. Studies of irreversible inhibition have shown that full re-
covery of normal MAO activity can require a period of ten to twenty days
(Planz et al. 1972). While harmine and its analogs are known to exhibit
strong MAO inhibition, this action is reversible and is on the order of
three to six hours (Undenfriend et al. 1958). If, however, we succeeded in

[* In Whitehead's phrase, this understanding is, however imperfect, the self-evidence of pattern so far
as it has been discriminated (1968, p. 52). In the same work (p. 50), Whitehead states, Understanding
is self-evidence . . . Proofs are the tools for the extension of our imperfect self-evidence. ]

creating a superconducting configuration in harmine and its analogs, then
we should expect that they would irreversibly bind to MAO as well as to
neural DNA, and thus may have produced the symptoms that followed
our experiment. MAO inhibition is reflected by a rise in 5HT levels in the
brain, since synthesis continues at a normal rate, while turnover of the
amine is inhibited (Planz et al. 1972.). If exogenously introduced trypta-
mines are present in the system, these will also accumulate in the absence
of MAO activity. Perhaps, in our experiment, the introduction of re-
versible MAO inhibitors plus tryptamines into the nervous system caused
an initial accumulation of serotonin and methylated tryptamines. Subse-
quently, these methylated tryptamines and possibly the 5HT, having their
usual conversion pathways blocked by MAO inhibition, became substrates
for other enzymes such as N-methyl transferase and hydroxy-indole
O-methyl transferase (HIOMT). These enzymes could further increase
the levels of methylated tryptamines. Some of these amines may have been
converted via the alternative enzyme pathways to psychotomimetic com-
pounds not amenable to MAO inactivation, which might continue to ac-
cumulate in the system even after normal MAO activity had been restored.
If our own theory is incorrect or incomplete, this may explain how we
were able to maintain a continuous connection with the unconscious over
many months.

At first we approached the psychedelic phenomenology of the Stropha-
ria mushroom with perfect innocence. Now understanding has placed us
forever beyond such unawareness. In comparison with synthetic psyche-
delics, the physical effects of S. cubensis compare with those of mescaline.
One must be particularly sensitive to incidents that might be precursors
to some sort of uncontrollable outbreak of unconscious contents. Our
theory seems to indicate that, for all its concern, the ego really is not able
to control the flow of events at all. If this is true and if a trance episode is
a constituent part of this phenomenon, then there is nothing to be done
to mitigate its inevitability. This is not, however, to be construed as a li-
cense for recklessness; on the contrary, one should act as though causality
is operable and the ego in control. The mushroom is a tool that allows an
insight into the state of the standing wave of mind on unconscious levels,
but it is not necessary for the continuation of that phenomenon. One
could forego the mushroom trance and thus eliminate a possible source of
toxic reversal. Our mushroom experiences allowed us to remember and
reconnect with deeper states of tryptamine ecstasy, to reconstruct and to
feel the poetic-literary idea complex that was, in fact, one motivation for
our program of investigation of natural tryptamines.

We refer to the dynamic yet stable, apparently self-sustaining, non-
three-dimensional spatiality into which the smoking of tryptamines con-
veys one. We especially refer to the apparently autonomous and intelligent,
chaotically mercurial and mischievous machine elves encountered in the
trance state, strange teachers whose marvelous singing makes intricate toys
out of the air and out of their own continually transforming body geome-
tries. This spectacle of more than Oriental splendor is the characteristic,
even unvarying, manner in which this experience presents itself. A sound,
which finally can be seen as a topology, dynamically contorts itself into a
form, whose voice the sound then becomes, and which it then uses to pro-
duce idea complexes presented with the specific purpose of teaching some-
thing. But this something is not easily brought back from that dimension,
and this fact sets up a dynamic polarity between the ego and the content of
the ecstasy. That polarity is the compass of our quest. That place or state is
the area inviting exploration. In some very real sense, it is the place where
ideas come from. In that other dimension, vast evolving idea complexes
pass before one and are understood in an instant. And through the singing
elf machines, many such object/ideas clamor (literally) for one's attention
at once. In the words of H. Munn, writing of mushroom use in Oxaca,
... the impish mushrooms come to life, embodiments of merriment,
tumbling figments of the spontaneous, performing incredible acrobatic
feats (in Harner 1973, p. no).

The content of the experience has an emotional richness that is pro-
foundly deep, yet so positive that one must laugh aloud. Inevitably, the
subjective richness, and the apparent self-coherence of the content of the
tryptamine trance, leads those who experience it to wonder after its impli-
cations for modern humans. The idea of the simultaneous coexistence of
an alien dimension all around us is as strange an idea in the context of
modern society as it must have been to the first shamans, whose experi-
ments with psychoactive plants would have soon brought them to the
same tryptamine doorway. What is the nature of the invisible landscape
beyond that doorway? The answer to the question is linked to the ques-
tion of the nature of mind. If the world beyond the doorway can be given
consensual validation of the sort extended to the electron and the black
hole—in other words, if the world beyond the doorway is found to be a
necessary part of scientifically mature thinking about the world—then
our own circumscribed historical struggle will be subject to whole new
worlds of possibility.

If poetics color the science of our way, these trances are their founda-
tions. Is this idea completely outside the realm of philosophical experience?
Jonas (1966), in discussing an allegory in Philo Judaeus, which evolves
from the etymology of the word Israel, he who sees God, says:

A more perfect archetypal logos, exempt from the human duality
of sign and thing, and therefore not bound by the forms of
speech, would not require the mediation of hearing, but is imme-
diately beheld by the mind as the truth of things. In other words
the antithesis of seeing and hearing argued by Philo lies as a whole
within the realm of seeing —that is to say, it is no real antithesis
but a difference of degree relative to the ideal of immediate intu-
itive presence of the object. It is with a view to this ideal that the
hearing here opposed to seeing is conceived, namely, as its
deputizing, provisional mode, and not as something authentic,
basically other than seeing. Accordingly, the turn from hearing to
seeing here envisaged is merely a progress from a limited knowl-
edge to an adequate knowledge of the same and within the same
project of knowledge. (p. 238)

This is an excellent description of the interiorized linguistic phenome-
non that proceeds and differs only in degree from the visual phenomenon,
which seems, indeed, a more perfect archetypal logos and which, in our
experience, defines the tryptamine trance experience. If the physical brain
is analogous to a holographic plate, can sounds in certain ranges penetrate
the skull in such a way as to make audile holograms (visual images) appear
in 3D space or in the mind-brain of another organism? This matter stands
completely unresearched, although audilely induced wave interference
patterns have been illuminated with lasers to produce hologramatic im-
ages (cf. chapter 4).

We are not alone in suggesting that the tryptamine compounds are
somehow vitally involved with the mysteries of language and language for-
mation:

The Mazatecs say that the mushrooms speak. If you ask a shaman
where his imagery comes from, he is likely to reply: I didn't say
it, the mushrooms did. No mushroom speaks, that is a primitive
anthropomorphization of the natural, only man speaks, but he

who eats these mushrooms, if he is a man of language, becomes
endowed with an inspired capacity to speak. The shamans who eat
them, their function is to speak, they are the speakers who chant
and sing the truth, they are the oral poets of their people, the doc-
tors of the word, they who tell what is wrong and how to remedy
it, the seers and oracles, the ones possessed by the voice. It is not
I who speak, said Heraclitus, it is the logos. Language is an
ecstatic activity of signification. Intoxicated by the mushrooms,
the fluency, the ease, the aptness of expression one becomes capa-
ble of are such that one is astounded by the words that issue forth
from the contact of the intention of articulation with the matter
of experience. At times it is as if one were being told what to say,
for the words leap to mind, one after another, of themselves with-
out having to be searched for: a phenomenon similar to the auto-
matic dictation of the surrealists except that here the flow of
consciousness, rather than being disconnected, tends to be coher-
ent: a rational enunciation of meanings. Message fields of commu-
nication with the world, others and one's self are disclosed by the
mushrooms. The spontaneity they liberate is not only perceptual,
but linguistic, the spontaneity of speech, of fervent, lucid dis-
course, of the logos in activity. For the shaman, it is as if existence
were uttering itself through him . . . words are materializations of
consciousness; language is a privileged vehicle of our relation to
reality. (Munn, in Harner 1973, pp. 88-89)

Summation of our Amazon experience is not easy. In the wake of our
experiment there have been, besides enormous disruptions of statistical
norms in the form of accumulations of meaningful coincidences, in-
stances of physical phenomena absolutely beyond current understanding.
Telepathic phenomena, especially, in our subjective judgment, were mani-
fest several times during this period. These experiences go an enormous
distance toward convincing us that we are indeed involved with a paranor-
mal phenomenon that may violate the usual laws of conventional physics.
These experiences have been the continuing motivation for our attempt
to empirically demonstrate the existence of this phenomenon. The viola-
tions have to date been inexplicable by any theory save the organismic
general theory of systems we have elaborated. It is this continuing self-
explication on the part of the phenomenon and the resolution of the

explication into a general theory of systems or process that sets our exper-
ience apart from the general gnosis of shamanism or schizophrenia. Be-
cause this theory makes assertions about reality, it invites careful empirical
investigation. It is for this reason that, while cultivating a suspended judg-
ment, we endeavor to allow the phenomenon every opportunity to reveal
and refine itself.

Part Two

Time,

Change,

and

Becoming

Introduction

In Part Two we will be concerned with some of the speculations arising
out of the apparent functioning of the audilely induced intercalation of
harmine into the genetic matrix. These speculations have arisen in the
months, and now years, that have followed upon our original experiment.
These extrapersonal thought processes arose in a temporal sequence of
steady self-amplification and explication; internal contradictions have
been few.

The chapters that follow require what may appear at first as a sharp
shift of focus. The discussion now moves from the methodological and
philosophical bases of our experiment to a rather formal exposition of the
calendrical potentials offered by the structure of the sequence of the hexa-
grams used in the classic Chinese divinatory system, the I Ching. This
concern may appear to be far removed from the molecular basis of Ama-
zonian shamanic trance, but in fact divination is the especial prerogative
of the shaman, whatever the cultural context. It is one of the major signs
of a shaman's command of a superhuman condition. The three-thousand-
year-old King Wen sequence of the sixty-four hexagrams of the / Ching is
among the oldest structured abstractions extant, yet the nature of the or-
dering principles preserved in that sequence remains unelucidated. The I
Ching is a mathematical divinatory tool of great age whose probable ori-
gin is the mountainous heart of Asia—the home of classical shamanism
and Taoist magic—it is a centrally important part of humanity's shamanic
heritage that is rich in implications. Chapter 8 traces some of the impli-
cations the / Ching may have had for neolithic China and its intuitions
concerning time. We chose to examine the / Ching and its relation to
temporality and organism because, in the months following our experi-
ment, their specific similarities seemed to force themselves upon us. It is
our supposition that the unconscious contents which our experiment
made accessible were constellated around the / Ching because it is particu-
larly concerned with the dynamic relationships and transformations that
archetypes undergo; it is deeply involved with the nature of time as the
necessary condition for the manifestation of archetypes as categories of ex-
perience. The / Ching, through its concern with detailing the dynamics of
change and process, may hold the key to modeling the temporal dimen-
sion that metabolism creates for organisms, the temporal dimension with-
out which mind could not manifest.

Our tentative assumption is that the intense involvement we experi-
enced with this problem arose out of the functioning of the harmine-DNA
complex and the intensified broadcast of the structurally modulated ESR
of that unusual molecular configuration. Chapter 9 examines the hypoth-
esized resonance calendar of the previous chapter from a point of view
that seeks to isolate the irreducible elements in such a hierarchical view of
time and then to treat them as the system by which organisms order their
world-describing cognitive categories. The later chapters of Part Two will
elevate the temporal variables contained in the / Ching calendar to the
level of a possible general law of nature descriptive of temporal variables in
macrophysical as well as quantum-mechanical systems. In chapter 10 we
discuss the nature of the order of the King Wen sequence and then pre-
sent techniques for graphically mapping the proposed temporal contin-
uum. Chapter 10 carries the mapping process to a new level of refinement
by presenting techniques for a comparative numerical quantification of
every point in the hierarchy relative to a zero state. The cosmology such a
general law of nature would make necessary is examined in chapter II,
which deals with the part of astrophysics relevant to the cosmic view of
the atemporal shaman. Chapter 12 discusses the teleology a temporal hier-
archy implies. In chapter 13 we discuss quantification of the hierarchy and
the opportunities it offers for attempts to experimentally test its empirical
existence. A systems approach to charting the parameters of the historical
future is also outlined. Chapter 14 discusses evolution and freedom in the
light of the above.

Chapter 8

The / Ching as Lunar Calendar and
Astronomical Calculator

The / Ching is an oracle system of great age in wide use in China since
around 1000 B.C. It consists of sixty-four hexagrams, or six-line figures.
Lines in a hexagram may be solid (—) or broken (- -), and a hexagram is
read from bottom to top. The resulting sixty-four permutations upon
these simple rules (figs. 15 and 16) were believed by the Chinese to reflect
universal categories, or archetypes, that could shed light on one's fate if one
properly consulted the oracle. The method of consulting the oracle has
changed over the centuries. Originally bones were used; later forty-nine
stalks of yarrow; still later coins were tossed. None of this will concern us
here. Neither will we be concerned with the voluminous commentaries,
doctrines, and interpretations of the / Ching that began in the early Han
dynasty and continue today. These matters are discussed thoroughly in
Wilhelm (1964) and Needham (1954,1965).

Our concern will be with facts that predate history, and with which no
commentary can claim to be contemporary. We will be concerned with
the primary unit of the / Ching, the hexagram. We will examine in detail
its three-leveled hierarchical structure. The King Wen sequence, the oldest
preserved human abstract sequence, will occupy us in later chapters as we
seek for its ordering principles, make assumptions, and advance hypothe-
ses. In this chapter, we will lay the groundwork for these more theoretical
discussions by detailing what we believe neolithic China was doing with
the / Ching, and hence why it was structured as it is.

Though the origins of the / Ching are uncertain, Joseph Needham
(1954) adopts the position of Li Ching-Chhih that . . . the canonical text
originated from omen compilations which might be as old as the 7th or
8th century [b.c], though it did not reach its present form before the end
of the Chou Dynasty (p. 307). Needham goes on to say: The first exten-
sion of the system of the kua (hexagrams) seems to have taken place dur-
ing the early Han period, when they were brought into systematic
association with sidereal movements and hence with the passage of time
(1954, p. 329). In a footnote to the above we find: Alternatively W. Eber-
hard suggests . . . that the / Ching hexagrams were connected with some
pre-Chhin calendar system (Needham 1954, p. 329n).

FIGURE 15

The King Wen arrangement of the sixty-four / Ching hexagrams.

This chapter will suggest in a speculative way a possible form that this
lost calendar may have had. Since we are not sinologists, the case will be
made around a single objective fact. We will extrapolate this fact through
the use of only two assumptions concerning ancient Chinese culture and
psychology. These assumptions are widely enough held among commen-
tators on Oriental culture that they may be regarded as secure statements
of a broad consensus. Of central interest is the coincidence of the duration
of thirteen lunations and the number 384. The true value for the duration
of a lunation is 29.530588 days. Examination of oracle bones dated to the
thirteenth century B.C. has, according to Needham, led to the conclusion
that at that time the length of the lunation was known to be 29.53 days.

29.53 days X 13 = 383.89 days

The nearness of this number to 384 is made significant when one realizes
that 384 is the number that arises when sixty-four is multiplied by six, six
being the number of yao or lines in a single hexagram. This last sentence in-
troduces one of the assumptions by which we will advance the argument. It
is the assumption of hierarchical or resonance thinking in Chinese intellec-
tual constructs. In this case, it is the notion that what is done with the yao,
the most basic element of a hexagram (multiplication by six to form a hexa-
gram), might also be done with the entire set of yao, the complete sequence
of sixty-four hexagrams. This idea that operations carried out on one level
are elegant and efficacious if carried out in a similar way on other levels is
intimately related to our second premise. This is the idea of cyclical recur-
rence of events and situations on many different scales of duration. The im-
portance of these ideas in ancient China has been widely noted. An example
of each will suffice. First, resonance thinking:

Much has already been said about the importance in the Chinese
worldview of action at a distance, in which the different kinds of
things in the universe resonate with one another. In the 5th cen-
tury A.D. Shih Shuo Hsin Yu we find the following:

Mr. Yin, a native of Chinchow, once asked a (Taoist) monk,
Chang Yeh-Yuan, 'What is really the fundamental idea (thi) of the
Book of Changes (I Ching)?'

The latter answered, 'The fundamental idea of the / Ching can
be expressed in one single word, Resonance (Kan).'

Mr. Yin then said, 'We are told that when the Copper Moun-
tain (Thung Shan) collapsed in the west, the bell Ling Chung

responded (ying), by resonance, in the east. Would this be accord-
ing to the principles of the / Ching?'

Chang Yeh-Yuan laughed and gave no answer to this ques-
tion. (Needham 1954, p. 304)

On cycles:

. . . Nothing could be more striking than the appreciation of cycli-
cal change, the cycle-mindedness, of the Taoists. Returning is the
characteristic movement of the Tao (the Order of Nature) says
the Tao Te Ching. Time's typical virtue, wrote Granet, is to
proceed by revolution. Indeed time (shih) is itself generated,
some thought, by this uncreated and spontaneous (tzu-jan) never-
ceasing circulation (yun). (Needham 1965, p. 6)

It is established, therefore, that striking correlations exist between a
count of 6 X 64 days and lunar motion. The 384-day year is a lunar year
of thirteen lunar months. Such a lunar year has been determined to be
383.9 days or .1 day less than 384 days. Therefore, the cycle loses 2.4 hours
(.1 day) each 384 days. If one were to adopt 384-day-long years as a calen-
dar and insert one intercalary day every ten of such years, making every
tenth year 385 days long, this calendar would lose one day every 454.5 of
its years. Thus, the calendar would be accurate to .0022 day loss per 384-
day year. This is accurate indeed as calendars go.

That neolithic calendars in China were lunar is generally regarded as
established. The two most likely year counts would necessarily be 384 days
(13 lunations) or 354 days (12 lunations). Three hundred eighty-four, if
used as a day count, seems to have resonances with the durations of other
astronomical cycles of longer duration. To demonstrate these resonances,
it is necessary to continue to apply the same principles of hierarchical ex-
trapolation that link the sixty-four hexagrams to a duration of 384; that is,
multiplication of subunits into larger modules via numbers inherent in
the structure of the / Ching: Six or sixty-four. We suggest that the 384-day
lunar year discussed above was viewed by the calendar makers of early
China as a hexagram. This idea would have arisen as a natural conse-
quence of observing the relationships between the six yao of a hexagram
and the six small cycles of sixty-four days, each of which together formed
the 384-day year. At this point in the process, it is reasonable to suppose
that the Chinese love of cycles, hierarchies, and resonances would have led
them, having cognized the 384-day year as a hexagram, to assume that 64

X 384 days was a natural division of time. Once begun, the process need
know no end. And indeed, 384 X 64 X 64 also shows interesting resonance
periods. In fact, several phenomena that have been found to be cyclical
appear to have relationships of correspondence to the calendrical hierar-
chy on one of its levels. As an example, we may point out that the 67.35-
year cycle (384 days X 64) is composed of six yao cycles of 11.225 years; this
is in astonishing agreement with the average sunspot cycle, whose dura-
tion is given as 11.2 years. What is perhaps even more startling is that the
cycle of sunspot frequency discloses a 33.33-year period along with its 11.2-
year period. The 33.67-year duration of the trigrammatic cycle is within
one-third year of this duration. It is an established fact that sunspot cycles
produce a periodicity in plant growth:

The growth of trees is accelerated during sunspot maxima; thus
the eleven-year sunspot cycle is reflected in the increasing and
decreasing width of the annual rings of trees. This effect is so reli-
able that archaeologists use it to date the establishment of ancient
settlements. (Knoll, in Campbell 1967, p. 291)

Periodically, in mental hospital wards, aggressive patients show
intense surges of activity . . . Such outbursts occur only sporadi-
cally but are striking enough to have invited study. At Douglas
Hospital in Montreal, continuous, round-the-clock observation
studies of patients over periods of several months did, indeed,
show a picture of such periodic outbursts. Correlations between
increased aggression and staff on duty, changes in menu, medica-
tion, or visiting days were too weak to explain the group behavior
. . . When no explanation could be found, Dr. Heinz Lehmann
compared his hospital data against data from the U.S. Space Dis-
turbance Forecast Center in Boulder, Colorado. There appeared
to be a correlation between solar flare activity (sun spots), geo-
magnetic disturbances, and excitement on the ward . . . Since
sun flares are bursts of gaseous material, high energy particles
that influence the ionosphere, causing changes in magnetic fields
on earth, a relationship is not impossible. Sun storms sometimes
cause a noticeable deflection in a compass needle. Perhaps, since
the brain is at least as sensitive as a fine compass, it also responds
to large magnetic disturbances. (Luce 1971, p. 14)

And sunspots were familiar to ancient Chinese:

As Ionides and Ionides have said, Chinese astrological conclusions
were for once perhaps right in maintaining a connection between
celestial and terrestrial phenomena. Though not at present gener-
ally admitted, it is not impossible that the sun-spot period may
be connected, through meteorological effects, with events of social
importance, such as good and bad harvests. Such a correlation is
indeed maintained for Japanese rice crop famines since a.d. 1750
by Arakawa. Conceivably the basis of the association made in
the Chi Ni Tzu book . . . between the 12-year Jupiter cycle and
an agricultural production cycle, may really have been, as Chatley

suggests, the n-year sun-spot period. Correlations between the
periodicity of sun-spot maxima and other phenomena such as
aurorea, using in part Chinese data, have been attempted by sev-
eral workers. (Needham 1954, vol. 2, p. 436)

One reason advanced for the use of a sexagenary cycle in the historical
Chinese calendar is that it is perhaps five repetitions of the approximately
twelve-year cycle of Jupiter (cf. above). Might it not be that five Jupiter
cycles equaling one sixty-year cycle and the solar year calendar of 360 days
were a clumsy replacement for an early sixty-four-year cycle of 384-day
years (67+ solar years) that also very accurately kept the sunspot cycle of
11.2 solar years.

The earliest Chinese dynasty whose calendar is known is the Chou. Ac-
cording to W. Eberhard, a 384-day year did exist in late Chou times,
although it was regarded as an intercalary year with the usual year of
twelve months being 354 days. Seven such intercalary years were inserted
in every nineteen years, that is, into the Lunar Metonic cycle (W. Eber-
hard, personal communication, 1974). This mixed calendar may repre-
sent a transition form from an earlier time when years of 384 days were
used exclusively.

In addition to the correlations to lunations and sunspot cycles cited,
there is yet another cycle of celestial movement that appears to be built
into the hierarchical / Ching calendar. This cycle is the zodiacal world
year generated by the slow precession of the equinoxes.

. . . the equinoctial points —and therefore, the solstitial ones,
too—do not remain forever where they should in order to make
celestial goings-on easier to understand, namely, at the same spot
with respect to the sphere of the fixed stars. Instead, they stub-
bornly move along the ecliptic in the opposite direction to the
yearly course of the sun, that is, against the right sequence of
the zodiacal signs . . . This phenomenon is called the Precession
of the Equinoxes, and it was conceived as causing the rise and the
cataclysmic fall of ages of the world. Its cause is a bad habit of
the axis of our globe, which turns around in the manner of a
spinning top, its tip being in the center of our small earth-ball,
whence our earth axis, prolonged to the celestial North Pole,
describes a circle around the North Pole of the ecliptic, the true
center of the planetary system, the radius of this circle being of
the same magnitude as the obliquity of the ecliptic with respect to

the equator: 23 1/2*. The time which this prolonged axis needs to
circumscribe the ecliptical North Pole is roughly 26,000 years,
during which period it points to one star after another: around
3000 B.C. the Pole star was alpha Draconis; at the time of the
Greeks it was beta Ursea Minoris; for the time being it is alpha
Ursea Minoris; in a.d. 14,000 it will be Vega. The equinoxes, the
points of intersection of ecliptic and equator, swinging from
the spinning axis of the earth, move along with the same speed of
26,000 years along the ecliptic. (de Santillana and von Dechend
1969, pp. 58-59)

Various mathematical treatments of the phenomenon of nutation (a
small periodic motion of the celestial pole with respect to the pole of the
ecliptic) introduce uncertainty into the duration of this year; de Santillana
gives it as 25,920 years, while Flamerion shows it as 25,780. Both these fig-
ures are in disagreement with the value contained in standard astronomical
tables, 25,725 years. We have already shown that 64 X 384 days gives a du-
ration (67+ years), sixths and halves of which have relation to sunspots.
When the 67+ year cycle is similarly treated (multiplied by 64), a duration
of 4,302+ years is obtained. One-sixth of this number seems to have no sig-
nificance astronomically; however, one-half of this number equals 2,153
years. This number is very close to the 2,200-year length of a zodiacal
year —the number that results when the duration of the precession
(25,700 years) is divided by the twelve zodiacal signs, giving zodiacal ages
approximately 2,200 years in duration. The correlation is too close to be
accidental. It can only enhance our respect for the prehistoric astronomy
of the Chinese, since it has long been assumed that no one could have de-
tected the equinoctial precession before it was allegedly discovered by Hip-
parchus in 127 B.C. It was natural that the Han astronomers should wish to
incorporate into their astronomy the sidereal periods of planetary revolu-
tion. Their thought was that at the beginning of a world cycle there had
been a general conjunction of the planets and that at the end of the world
this would happen again. This notion of a general conjunction occurs in
Hellenistic literature and may derive from Berossus and the Babylonians.

Discovery of calendrical properties operating in the / Ching that appear
to bear a relation to a lunar year of thirteen cycles and to the zodiacal
world year, as well as to sunspot cycles, suggests a possible historical spec-
ulation. The Chinese year has an average duration of 360 days. It is in es-
sential agreement with the lunar Metonic year developed in fifth-century
Athens. The thirteen-month lunar / Ching calendar is composed of 13 X

29.53 days; 12 X 29.53 = 354.4 days, while a solar year is 365.25 days. The
average of these numbers is 359.85, or within .15 of an average Chinese
year. Richard Wilhelm (1964), in discussing the age of the / Ching and its
attribution to the legendary figure Fu Hsi, says: The fact that he (Fu Hsi)
is designated as the inventor of the linear signs of the Book of Changes
means that they have been held to be of such antiquity that they antedate
historical memory (p. xxxviii). Other scholars agree:

Eberhard believes that it is possible to trace several local calendars
in very ancient times and that it was this which gave rise to the
idea that there had been official calendars of the Hsia, Shang and
Chou dynasties. Jao Tsung-I has described an interesting calen-
drical diagram, with text, inscribed on silk and of Chhu State
provenance, dating from about the 4th century. Han calendars
have been studied by Shinjo and by Eberhard Henseling . . .
(Needham 1954, vol. 2, p. 391)

It is possible to suggest that in neolithic China the sequence of 64 hexa-
grams X 6 was actually known and used as a calendar. This calendar was
very early displaced by the more seasonally oriented, yet less astronomi-
cally functional 360-day solar year calendar.

One can only speculate how and why this may have happened. Perhaps
the astronomical rationale behind the 384-day calendar had degenerated
into a secret knowledge, confined to a ruling or priestly class that came
into conflict with a popular, rationalistic, antiesoteric faction that sought
the elimination of the thirteenth lunar cycle in order to reform the calen-
dar to more nearly conform with the solar year. W. Eberhard (personal
communication, 1974) has pointed out that traditionally in China the
number thirteen has not been highly regarded; it is a prime number and
as such is not reducible to two (female) or three (male) or four or nine.
For the traditional Chinese, twelve preserves harmony and thirteen dis-
turbs it. This Chinese attitude may be a clue to the non-Chinese origin of
the / Ching and the thirteen-month lunar cycle calendar possibly associ-
ated with it. In Han times, the / Ching was called the Chou /and was as-
sumed to have originated with that dynasty in the far northwest of China.
A calendar and astronomy being introduced from outside of China would
naturally encounter resistance.

If this controversy became overt and violent, we can imagine the occur-
rence of events similar to the book burning of 213 B.C., which may have
resulted in all but complete destruction of the thirteen-month lunar cal-
endar and knowledge of its relation to the hexagram sequence. The super-
stition that each new dynasty or reign period must make all things new is
very old in China and has often resulted in changes in the calendar after
times of social crisis. It would be some time after the adoption of a re-
formed solar calendar before the loss of astronomical utility through aban-
donment of the lunar 384-day calendar would be realized. After such a
time, from the middle Chou onward, the knowledge of how to construct
the lunar calendar may have existed only in scattered fragments and cryp-
tic sayings such as represent the earliest extant commentary material on
the / Ching. Wilhelm (1964) reproduces this material as the Shuo Kua—
Discussion of the Trigrams. Some of the ambiguities in this material seem
to be dissipated by the assumption that a hierarchical hexagram sequence
calendar is being referred to.

The relative clumsiness of the traditional Chinese calendar seems to
lend support to this idea that it conceals an older, reformed lunar calen-
dar. The traditional Chinese calendar had an average length of 360 days,
into which two intercalary months were inserted every five years. This
means that a lunar year of twelve months would have 354.4 days per year,
which is 5.6 days short of the average duration of 360 days. The solar year,
on the other hand, is 5.25 days longer than the 360-day year. When 10.85,
the sum of 5.25 + 5.6, is taken times 5 (the five years into which the two in-
tercalary months are inserted), the result is 54.26 days, which is approxi-
mately five days less than exactly two lunar months. These calculations
show that, in spite of the insertion of the two extra lunar months every
five years, this calendar—if we assume lunar months of 29.53 days were
used—would still gain 4.8 days every five years; compare this to the loss of
one day every 454.5 lunar years for a thirteen-month lunar year of 384
days, with only one intercalary day every ten years. This latter represents a
level of accuracy improved by a factor of many thousands. Even in com-
parison with the Gregorian calendar in use in the modern West, this cal-
endar is more accurate by a factor well over one hundred. The Gregorian
calendar adds one day every four years; the / Ching calendar adds one day
every 454.5 of its 384-day years, with the insertion of one intercalary day
every ten years. Even without this latter insertion, the proposed / Ching
lunar calendar is more than twice as accurate as the Gregorian.

Insight into the Chinese view of calendars and their makers is afforded
by examination of hexagram 49, Revolution. Hexagram 49 specifically
connects great revolutions with calendrical reforms, and the Confucian
commentary on the Image goes further and specifically connects the role
of the shaman with that of a calendar maker: The Image: Fire in the
Lake, the Image of Revolution. Thus the Superior Man sets the calendar
in order and makes the seasons clear (Wilhelm 1964, p. 201). The Com-
mentary interprets in part as follows: Arrangement of the calendar is sug-
gested by Tui which means a magician, a calendar maker (Wilhelm 1964,
p. 202). The Judgment adds:

Times change, and with them their demands. Thus the seasons
change ... In the world cycle also there are Spring and Autumn
in the life of peoples and nations, and all these call for social trans-
formations ... In the course of the year a combat takes place
between the forces of light. . . and . . . of darkness, eventuating
in the revolution of the seasons. Man masters these changes in
nature by noting their regularity and marking off the passage
of time accordingly. In this way order and clarity appear in the
apparently chaotic changes of the seasons, and man is able to
adjust himself in advance to the demands of the different times.
(Wilhelm 1964, p. 202)

In the above, we suggest that the changes of the seasons may be a
poor translation; since the progress of the seasons is not apparently
chaotic, a cycle of epochs or psychological seasons may be indicated.
This entire passage appears to obliquely refer to the kinds of temporal
cycles hidden in the / Ching and to hint at its esoteric function as a cal-
endar and astronomical calculator.

Chapter 9

Order in the / Ching and Order in the World

L. L. Whyte pinpointed the problem at the center of the crisis in biology
in his Internal Factors in Evolution (1965). Whyte says this:

The fundamental spatial and temporal laws of the developing
organization of local processes are still obscure.

What is missing? Possibly knowledge of certain crucial facts,
but certainly a sufficiently clear formulation of the problem. We
cannot expect to understand organization until we know what
we are looking for in terms of mathematics [italics mine]. The use
of mathematical standards alone can clarify the aim of a theory of
organization . . . The mathematical task, as I see it, is to identify
the Coordinative Conditions (C.C.), i.e., the general algebraic con-
ditions expressing the biological spatio-temporal coordination, the
rules of ordering which must be satisfied (to within a threshold)
by the internal parts and processes of any cellular organism capa-
ble of developing and surviving in some environment. The C.C.
are the expression of geometrical, 3D, or perhaps kinematic rules
determining the necessary 3D or spatio-temporal network of the
relations of the atoms, ions, molecules, organelles, etc., in a viable
organism. They are necessary in the individual, not merely statisti-
cal over assemblies. The C.C. must cover all the fundamental
aspects of the unity of organisms . . .

The C.C. are not merely morphological, expressing relative
spatial positions and orientations within the ordered system (not
in an arbitrary external frame), but morphogenetic, representing
a one-way tendency towards the development of stationary forms.
In other words the C.C. not only define an invariant characteristic
configuration which tends to persist through all the normal trans-
formations of the system (i.e., through growth, functioning,
reproduction, etc.) but also a dynamic tendency towards ordered
equilibrium, i.e., a self-ordered and self-stabilizing process. Thus
the C.C. are the mathematical conditions which cover not only
the homeostatic (feed-back control, etc.) properties of the organ-
ism, but also its one-way development. Indeed from a logical and
mathematical point of view the stationary properties must be
secondary consequences, arising under limiting conditions, of a

one-way developmental principle. Ontogenetic development is
theoretically primary to homeostasis and cyclic function.

The C.C. may be a single set of conditions applying at all
levels of structure, from the nucleus of the germ cells to the organ-
ism as a whole, or they may be a hierarchy of conditions. They are
certainly strong, in the sense that they impose a high degree of
order, but they are not maximal, for they leave many parameters
free to vary (fluid regions, flexibility, mobility, learning, successful
mutations, etc.). (pp. 33-36)

Whyte discusses the schema of Coordinative Conditions as they might
be applied to living systems. Our own thought, in accordance with the
formative first principle of organismic philosophy as developed by White-
head (cf. chapter 3), has been to extend the idea of organism to all pro-
cesses and systems in the universe and therefore to seek a general systems
theory or set of C.C. quite as applicable to events on the macrogalactic or
inner-atomic levels as to the specifically biological realm. As Albert Wil-
son points out:

It is interesting to note that the gravitational potential of the uni-
verse is near the Schwartzchild Limit, the theoretical maximal
value for potential. These quantitative equivalences indicate that
there probably exist basic causal qualitative relations between the
structure of the universe and the properties of the atom and its
nucleus (the question of the direction of causality being open).
(A. Wilson, in Whyte et al. 1969, p. 120)

Whyte (1965), amplifies the character of the system theory being sought:

It will be recalled that the C.C. are the algebraic expression of the
3D geometrical and kinetic conditions determining the spatial and
temporal relations of parts and process in all viable organisms.
Our assumption here is that the conception of the C.C. and their
actual form will one day be as commonplace to structural biolo-
gists as Maxwell's equations are now to physicists. The C.C. are
out there in nature, just as much as Maxwell's equations. What
can be said of them today?

They are certainly set in 3D space, not in some higher abstract
manifold. They are time-scaled, i.e., contain natural units of

length and time (or the equivalent), though in many circum-
stances organic structures and processes vary greatly in spatial and
temporal scale. Moreover, the C.C. probably employ collective
parameters, i.e., global variables associated with organic systems as
a whole and their internal relations, and not with ultimate parts.
The C.C. must be capable of representing both relatively stable
structures and the formative processes which generate them . . .

. . . What is missing? Individual structural facts covering sta-
tionary aspects are being collected at an unprecedented rate, but
the basic theoretical principles of a structural and dynamic synthe-
sis are lacking. What character must these principles possess?
What must be their aim?

The answer is surely beyond doubt. What is lacking is a mathe-
matical conception of the character of the unity of organism, and of
organic subunits. . . (pp. 103ff.)

Whyte goes on to pose seven questions inviting further research, three
of which have special import for our own work:

4.  In view of the unique theoretical scope of chiral (skew or
screw) forms which are capable of determining both polar-electri-
cal and axial-magnetic correlations, and of the prevalence of helical
arrangements and left-handed amino acids in organisms, are the
C.C. related to helical pulsations, i.e., to change in helical angles?

5.  Do all vital processes involve pulsating structures undergoing
simultaneous cycles of geometrical deformation and electro-mag-
netic polarization? If so do mutated genotypes have to be capable of
conforming to such pulsations?

6. Are the C.C. the expression of an ordering tendency, related
to the movement towards minimum potential energy of complex
low temperature systems, which can account both for the genesis
of life and for its maintenance? (1965, pp. iio-iii)

With all of the preceding in mind, we now advance to our own version
of the Coordinative Conditions and their interrelationships. Our opera-
tional premise has been that cognitive categories, memories, mentation,
and even archetypal deep structures are phenomena whose genesis is to be
sought in conformational changes at the molecular level; specifically, that
such mental phenomena reflect dynamic processes and structural modifi-
cations mediated by DNA during the performance of its function of

homeostatically regulating the organism and its storing of information as
reflexes and memories. This premise, that cognitive categories reflect orga-
nizing principles at work in the physical structure of the human organism,
allows us to examine abstract and symbolic systems of thought from a
new point of view, from a point of view that asks, What do the structures
of rituals, divinatory processes, and other appealing and persistent, yet
nonrational idea systems reflect concerning the physical organization
schema that lie at the foundation of brain and mind? This method was
anticipated by Jung, who examined myth and religion to reveal the struc-
ture and dynamics of the psyche.

There can be little doubt that Jung regarded the / Ching as a repository
of archetypes, just as the / Ching says of itself that it contains the cate-
gories of all that is. Stilling of the heart techniques, physical techniques
that retard normal autonomic processes and allow deep and sustained pe-
riods of inspection of the organization of the psyche are at the heart of
Taoist yoga and Chinese alchemical thinking. It seems conceivable that, if
one grants that the organization of the psyche reflects the organization of
its physical foundations, shamanic and yogic techniques that allow deep
insight into the organization of consciousness and its categories might
also allow their practitioners to gain an intuitional sense of the nature of
physical organization. In the West, the Pythagoreans exemplify an early
philosophical school in possession of ecstatic techniques and concerned
with the organization of matter. It is reasonable to suggest that these con-
cerns were congruent in ancient China as well. Our intuition has been
that consciousness could not fail to reflect the shifting modalities of the
energy continuum of metabolism that is its ground. We believe time to be
not a homogeneous medium, but a flux of variables or a field of nonsto-
chastic perturbations of the flow of probability. We feel that the quantum
theory was the announcement of the discovery of these laws in micro-
physical systems, and that elucidation of the nature of organism will
somehow involve the extension of the idea of temporal variables into a hi-
erarchical theory that recognizes quantized flux phenomena at every level
of space-time organization.

The King Wen sequence of the / Ching represents for us, as well as for
the ancient Chinese, a neolithic intuition concerning the structure of psy-
chic time, arrived at through the slow growth of folk traditions concerning
the nature and order of the internal categories. As mind arises out of or-
ganism and organism out of inorganic matter, is it possible that the /
Ching sequence holds a reflection not only of psychic organization but also

of the nature and order of the temporal variables that are its stated concern
to describe? Such variables may be the formative boundary conditions
with which evolving life had to cope, and which it came to reflect. In judg-
ing this hypothesis, we should not lose sight of the fact that all science is
done in just this way; flashes of creative insight, which are nothing more
than revelation of the organization of the psyche, are found to map onto
a part of reality and thus are validated as true. Experiment always plays a
part in such a process; we cannot know if experiments, as we would con-
ceive them, were ever undertaken with regard to these theories. We know
nothing of the methods of pre-Han science. The / Ching appears occult to
the West, since we have an automatic assumption concerning the nature of
time and causality. But this assumption hides from us the nature of time
and organism. Perhaps the ancient Chinese were not so unfortunate. The
dependency of Western physical science on physical instrumentality is so
great that we cannot imagine achieving insight into the organization of
matter without such instruments. Actually, an advanced psychology might
achieve insight into the C.C. through entirely internalized techniques of
manipulating and observing the organism. Since long before history, such
techniques have been the special province of the shaman.

Before turning to the King Wen sequence of the sixty-four hexagrams of
the / Ching and what that sequence may reveal of the order of the temporal
variables, we should first examine some of the special properties that are
possessed by the number sixty-four apart from any other considerations.

It is well known that sixty-four codons, of three nucleotide units, are
used by DNA and RNA to specify amino acids used in protein synthesis.
What is not so well known is the rule proposed by the anthropologist An-
thony E C. Wallace that limits the maximum number of entities that can
be contained in a folk taxonomy to sixty-four. Since a taxonomy is a
map of conceptual categories, his idea has importance for our own the-
ory of conscious organization:

. . . The hypothesis, which we shall call the 2[to the 6th power] Rule, is, then,
that irrespective of race, culture, or evolutionary level, culturally insti-
tutionalized folk taxonomies will not contain more than 2[to the 6th power] entities
and consequently will not require more than six orthogonally
related binary dimensions for the definitions of all of the terms

[italics his].

... In the area of cultural semantics, we are suggesting that a
somewhat similar principle applies. . . the evolution of cultural

complexity is limited, in so far as folk taxonomies are concerned, by
the two-to-the-sixth-power rule [italics his] . . . What is limited is
the complexity of the taxonomies which are components of the
various cultural sub-systems. (Wallace 1961, p. 462)

The / Ching is just such a taxonomy, a group of symbols . . . which de-
note mutually exclusive but jointly exhaustive subsets of referents within a
set denoted by a cover symbol and which (unlike names) are defined by
unique combinations of values on two or more conceptual dimensions
(Wallace 1961, p. 462).

Wallaces work supports our contention that there is a definite relation
between the categories of experiential archetypes and the numerical foun-
dations of the / Ching. With that fact as a beginning, we turn our atten-
tion to the King Wen sequence of the sixty-four hexagrams to seek the
nature of the order of that sequence for what it might reveal about time
and metabolism.

The earliest arrangement of the hexagrams of the / Ching is the King
Wen sequence. It was this sequence that was chosen to be studied as a pos-
sible basis for a new model of the relationship of time to the ingression
and conservation of novelty. In studying the kinds of order in the King
Wen sequence of the / Ching a number of remarkable discoveries were
made. It is well known that hexagrams in the King Wen sequence occur in
pairs. The second member of each pair is obtained by inverting the first.
In any sequence of the sixty-four hexagrams there are eight hexagrams
that remain unchanged when inverted. In the King Wen sequence, these
eight hexagrams are paired with hexagrams in which each line of the first
hexagram has become its opposite (yang changed to yin and vice versa).

The question remains as to what rule or principle governs the arrange-
ment of the thirty-two pairs of hexagrams comprising the King Wen se-
quence. Here we find ourselves in an intellectual terra incognita; no
known basis exists for determining why pairs are arranged as they are or
why one member of a pair precedes another. Our intuition in seeking a so-
lution to these problems was to look at the first order of difference. First
order of difference refers to how many lines change as one moves through
the King Wen sequence from one hexagram to the next. The first order of
difference will always be an integer between one and six. When the first
order of difference within pairs is examined it is always found to be an
even number. Thus all instances of odd values for the first order of differ-
ence occur at transitions from one pair of hexagrams to the next pair.

When the complete set of first order of difference integers generated by the
King Wen sequence is examined, they are found to fall into a perfect ratio
of three to one; three even integers to each odd integer. The ratio of three
to one is not a formal property of any or most sequences but was a care-
fully constructed artifact achieved by arranging hexagram transitions be-
tween pairs to generate fourteen instances of three and two instances of
one. Fives were deliberately excluded. This exclusion of fives is also not a
necessary property of the system. We may be sure that the King Wen se-
quence has been consciously constructed to discriminate against a change
of five lines as one moves from one hexagram to another through the se-
quence. The case of hexagrams 38 and 39 is particularly instructive in this

regard.

Previously we noted that, as a natural consequence of the system, there
would be eight instances where inverting a hexagram would have no effect,
and so all lines must be changed to their opposites. When we examine
Table II (fig. 17), however, we find that there are in fact nine such cases.
One, the synthetic case, is the transition from 38 to 39. If the arrangement
of the thirty-two pairs was random, we could expect other instances where
the second term in one pair and the first term in the following pair hap-
pened to be opposites with an order of difference of six. But, in fact, this
situation occurs in the sequence only in this one case. If there was a con-
scious effort to include only the eight necessary pairs with the differences
of six, why was the additional occurrence of the value allowed? The answer
appears to be directly related to the absence of first order of difference val-
ues of five noted above. If the order of the natural pair 39 and 40 were to
be reversed, the value of the change between 39 and 41, which would then
follow 39, would be five. The fourteen threes and two ones constitute six-
teen instances of an odd integer occurring out of a possible sixty-four. This
is a three to one ratio exactly. As it is a property of the system that the tran-
sition values within pairs will give even values, we can conclude that of the
transition values that could be consciously manipulated in a final arrange-
ment, those were chosen in which the odd and even transitions were
equally and exactly apportioned.

Our conclusion is that the King Wen sequence was ordered, aside from
the already stated rules that generate the hexagram pairs, on the following
rules:

1. Order among the thirty-two pairs was determined by a wish to ab-
solutely exclude transition situations with a value of five.

2. Order among the thirty-two pairs was secondarily determined by a
similar wish to absolutely exclude transition situations with a value of one,
except in cases where this would interfere with rule (1). (Note: Only two

instances of transitions with a value of one occur, and both cases occur in
situations where reversing the members of the pairs involved [pairs 53-54
and 61-62] would cause transition values of five.)

3. A three to one ratio of even to odd transitions was maintained.

As if these synthetic symmetries were not enough, in addition we find
that when the first order of difference of the King Wen sequence is graphed
it appears random or unpredictable (fig. 18A). However, when an image of
the graph is rotated 180 degrees within the plane and superimposed upon
itself, it is found to achieve closure at four adjacent points (fig. 18B).

While this closure might logically be expected anywhere in the sequence,
it in fact occurs at the conventional beginning and end of the sequence.

More than 1.2 million hexagram sequences were randomly generated by
computer (all sequences having the property possessed by the King Wen se-
quence that every second hexagram is either the inverse or the complement
of its predecessor). Of these 1.2 million Wen-like sequences, 805 were found
to have the properties of a three to one ratio of even to odd transitions, no
transitions of value five, and the type of closure described previously. Such
sequences were found to be very rare, occurring in only .07 cases or approxi-
mately one in every 1,769 of the Wen-like sequences.

For these reasons we were led to view the King Wen sequence as a pro-
foundly artificial arrangement of the sixty-four hexagrams. Look carefully
at figure 18B. Review in your mind the steps from the King Wen sequence
that led to it. Notice that it is a complete set of the sixty-four possible
hexagrams, running sequentially both forward and backward. Since it is
composed of sixty-four hexagrams of six lines each, it is composed of 6 X
64 lines or 384 lines or yao. One might make an analogy and say that fig-
ure 18B is to the King Wen sequence as a cube is to a square. Figure 18B is
composed of the same elements as the King Wen sequence but it has more
dimensions.

The point that we wish to make in this discussion is that the first order
of difference among the hexagrams, as they are read in a linear sequence,
was consciously and deliberately ordered in very ancient times. Why this
was done we cannot yet say, but the fact that it was done validates our con-
tention the these mathematical qualities of the / Ching were factors of
which the neolithic Chinese were well aware. Whether they graphed the
first order of difference, as we have done in figures 18A and B, is moot.
Graphing is not necessary; simple numerical quantification of the orders of
difference gives the idea of the continuum of the sequence. Nevertheless,
establishing the values of the first order of difference among the hexagrams

as a conscious part of the pre-Han traditions causes us to believe that it is
valid to examine the graph to see why such care was taken with the order
of its first order of difference values.

Although the graph appears relatively unstructured, it is evident that it
contains a singularity: The first and last three positions of the graph are
congruent mirror images of each other. Thus, congruence occurs at both
ends of the graph when it is rotated in two dimensions and placed next to
itself (cf. fig. 18B). While an arrangement with closure might have placed
any two hexagrams opposite each other, what we in fact find is that the
hexagrams opposite each other are such that the numbers of their positions
in the King Wen sequence when summed are always equal to sixty-four.

The graph that this whole process generates (fig. 18B), or at least the
two columns of value differences that are its numerical equivalent, seems
to us to have been at the basis of the King Wen sequence. Our case has
been thus far, we hope, a logical extension of qualities clearly important to
those who organized the / Ching into the King Wen sequence.

Now we will turn to the question, why was this particular sequence of
first orders of difference so important? What did it mean to its makers;
what were they seeking to model with it? In chapter 8 we attempted to rea-
son toward the structure of a multileveled hierarchical calendar that we be-
lieve was used in pre-Han China, a calendar based on the / Ching and
simple mathematical extrapolations of it. In the present chapter we have
argued that the King Wen sequence was ordered so as to give special atten-
tion to the first order of difference among the hexagrams, when they are
taken in linear order. The nature of the first and last three of these first-
order-of-difference values suggests that each was designed to be paired
with its opposite number in a reversed sequence to form a backward- and
forward-running continuum of the first order of difference. This contin-
uum may be numerically displayed or actually graphed as in figure 18B.

To answer the question, Why was this done? we must recall the prin-
ciples used to construct the calendrical hierarchy that emerged from chap-
ter 8. We believe those principles should be applied to the graphic
portrayal of the continuum of the backward- and forward-running se-
quence that the wave of figure 18B represents. Figure 18B is a graphic pic-
ture of the entire sequence of the / Ching, yet we propose that it was
treated as the smallest unit in a series of hierarchical macro-hexagrams. In
other words, we believe that the oracle-constructing Chinese viewed the
complete set of forward- and backward-running valuations of the first
order of difference of the King Wen sequence as equivalent to a line, a yao,
and, therefore, open to the same manipulation as lines are subject to in

the / Ching and the / Ching calendar; that is, multiplication by six and
sixty-four.

Above, we stated the opinion that these operations were undertaken
with a desire to portray what was known to the Chinese concerning
time—observations made on the basis of a sophisticated and interiorized
psychological view of the world. We believe that the quantum-mechanical
parameters of mind eventually may have become accessible to observation
and description through such an approach. A perfected organismic psy-
chology might have evolved into a science of process in organism at every
level of organization far more easily than the static Western physical sci-
ences. The world as dynamic process, an idea basic to Vedic and Taoist
viewpoints, makes the wave mechanics of postquantum physics seem
quite natural, although in the Western scientific tradition it marks an ex-
treme reorganization of thought that involves nothing less than the aban-
donment of determinism and materialism.

To extend our hypothesis, we will consider the space-time continuum
as a modular wave-hierarchy. This hierarchy is composed of waves that
have, on the most simple level, the configuration that is generated by fig-
ure 18B. The energy map of changes plotted backward upon itself forms
pairs that, when added together, always equal sixty-four. The graph was
seemingly constructed to be superimposed backward upon itself, suggest-
ing to us that time was understood to function with the same holographic
properties that have long been an accepted part of the phenomenon of the
perception of three-dimensional space. This also suggests that interference
patterns are characteristic of process. Living beings especially illustrate this:
They are an instance of the superimposition of many different chemical
waves, waves of gene expression and of gene inhibition, waves of energy re-
lease and energy consumption, forming the standing wave interference
patterns characteristic of life.

We hypothesize that the wave description generated by this combining
of the two graph lines is the simple form of a more complex wave that uti-
lizes the simple wave of figure 18B as the primary unit in a system of such
units, combined in the same way as lines are combined into trigrams and
then hexagrams in the / Ching (cf. fig. 19). We will argue that this more
complex wave (fig. 19) is a kind of temporal map of the changing bound-
ary conditions that exist in space and time, including future time. Time,
like light, may best be described as a union of opposites. Time may be
both wave and, ultimately, particle, each in some sense a reflection of the
other. We have called the quantized wave-particle, whatever its level of oc-
currence within the hierarchy or its duration, eschaton (fig. 19):

. . . Koestler addresses the question of what to call entities that
belong to hierarchical systems. They have two aspects, ... the
functional units on every level of the hierarchy are double-faced as
it were; they act as wholes when facing downwards, as parts when
facing upwards. (Koestler 1967.) He elects to designate these
Janus-faced entities by the term holon (from the Greek holos =
whole plus the suffix on as in proton or neutron suggesting a par-
ticle or part). We note that Gerard uses the term org to designate
the same concept. . . (D. Wilson, in Whyte et al. 1969, p. 288)

This construct may best be understood as a reflection in the temporal
dimension of the patterns that impart structural order to organisms and
their view of the world. Space-time within this idea model is entirely com-
posed of these hierarchically nested waves. Each such wave is exactly like
all the others, their differences arising out of their relational positions in
the hierarchy. Each wave, by itself, contains the entire modular hierarchy
through its being a reflection of organization on higher and lower levels in
an extensive continuum (cf. fig. 19). These wave systems, in duplicating
themselves on various levels, lose none of their original properties. We
hoped to map temporal variables using a wave-mechanical and holo-
graphic theory which holds that the ingression of novelty into the tempo-
ral continuum might conform to the wave described in figures 18B and 19.
The claim that any spatiotemporal span can be described by wave me-
chanics may sound deterministic, but such is not the case. The nature of
time is conditioned by space and vice versa, so that the individual, by util-
izing energy in proper ways, can go to the places and think the thoughts
that will hold him (within the vicissitudes of the wave-hierarchy as it con-
stellates his historical position) as close to an ideal as possible. An organ-
ism is confronted with possibilities just as a particle is confronted with
probabilities:

The initial state will be represented, complete with the uncertain-
ties which it involves, by a certain initial form of the associated
wave. The later changes of the wave can be predicted exactly by
the equations of Wave Mechanics: but this does not mean an
absolute Determinism for the corpuscle, since knowledge of the
wave at every instant only enables us to assign certain probabilities
to the various hypotheses tenable as to the position and momen-
tum of the corpuscle. In a word, then, while the older Mechanics
claimed to apply exact and inexorable laws to every phenomenon,

the new Physics only gives us laws of probability, and though
these can be expressed in exact formulae, they still remain laws of
probability. Thus in every physical phenomenon there remains a
margin of uncertainty; and it is possible to ascertain that this mar-
gin of uncertainty is measured, in a way, by the constant, h. Figu-
ratively, it has been said that there was a crack in the wall of
physical Determinism, whose size was measured by Planck's con-
stant, h; and thus the latter receives a somewhat unexpected inter-
pretation: it is supposed to be the limiting barrier of
Determinism. (De Broglie 1970, p. 246)

These ideas have implications for the physicist, philosopher, and psy-
chologist. Simply put, we are saying that the wave-hierarchy of energy
that regulates the ingression of novelty into time thus constellates the
world of our experience in its entirety and therefore also in all of its pos-
sible subsets, so that in any span of time or space, if one can determine
where to begin the generation of the wave description, space-time under
examination will be quantified relative to an ideal zero state to as great a
depth as one wishes to resolve the levels in the wave-hierarchy This expli-
cation is quantitative, and yet may also utilize the linguistic framework
that the / Ching commentaries provide.

Chapter 10

The King Wen Sequence as a
Quantified Modular Hierarchy

Chapter 9 introduced the simple wave we have construed out of the King
Wen sequence through a particular graphing technique. In chapter 9, use
of the simple wave as the primary unit in a modular hierarchy was alluded
to and exhibits were offered to demonstrate the ordering principles of the
King Wen sequence. This simple wave of the backward- and forward-
running transitions in a single complete King Wen sequence of the /
Ching (fig. 18B) can easily serve to model the physical structure of a single
helical strand of DNA and its transformations: replication, duplication,
and RNA transcription. These are in vitro functions of DNA and do not
shed light on the dynamic and harmonic relations that exist in the in vivo
world of the cell nucleus. The single-strand functions of DNA are well
understood, but systems properties that appear in a living cell have not
even begun to be clarified.

If the constant intercalation of 5HT into bond sites between codons,
now a recognized part of 5HT metabolism (cf. fig. 9), does significantly
alter ESR patterns in DNA, then it seemed likely to us that interference
patterns that such a shifting of ESR signatures would generate might pro-
vide the mechanism for the hologramatic standing wave that the living
system has developed to model within itself the world it encounters be-
yond itself. Only 10 percent of DNA is involved in protein synthesis. The
functions of the other 90 percent are uncertain, but we suggest that an or-
ganism's entire internal horizon of experience is created and maintained
in the energy continuum, which neural DNA regulates and maintains.
Thought and reflection may be holographic functions that take place
against the background of the energy flow of metabolism that DNA con-
trols. It is this flow of energy that is experienced by organisms as the phe-
nomenon of time itself. Organisms evolved in and became patterned in

response to this flow.

We hoped to apply the idea of a modular hierarchy to the simple wave,
using the kinds of resonance cycles our calendrical studies implied, and
thus to generate maps of the continuum of temporal variables. If our spec-
ulation is sound, such maps should function as graphs of the continuum
of metabolic energy, which we call time, and should thus have relevance
to the individual and to his or her life—the ontogenetic expression of

DNA—as well as to history or species' time, which is DNA's phylogenetic
expression. To do this, we have chosen to treat the simple wave (fig. 18B),
which is itself a composite expression of the entire / Ching, as a primary
unit in a hierarchy in which every level is structured on the same principles
as are the levels above and below it. This is termed a modular hierarchy:

The central idea in a modular hierarchy is the module which is
a structure or a system that may be regarded both as a whole, de-
composible into submodules identified with a lower level, and as a
part combinable into super-modules identified with a higher level.

. . . The term module being used here in this general sense
need not be precisely defined, however, we may ascribe two funda-
mental properties to modules. First, a module possesses some sort
of closure or partial closure (Wilson 1969). This closure may be
topological, temporal, or defined by some operational rule as in
group theory. Second, modules possess a degree of semi-autonomy
with respect to other modules and to their context. These two
properties appear to be common in all modular hierarchies. (A.
Wilson, in Whyte et al. 1969, p. 115)

Recall from chapter 8 that the primary unit in the / Ching is the line, or
yao. A full sequence of sixty-four hexagrams contains 384 yao. Hierarchi-
cally situated above the yao is the hexagram, composed of six yao, which
traditionally has been divided into two subunits of three lines each. Such
subunits are called trigrams, and two trigrams form one hexagram. Follow-
ing the same principles of construction, we have arranged six simple graphs
in sequential order. These are analogous to the six lines of a hexagram.
Over these we have superimposed, in sequential order, two more simple
waves, each three times the size of the six small waves. These two larger
waves are equivalent to the two trigrams in any hexagram. Superimposed
over the sequence of six and two is a final simple wave, standing for the en-
tire hexagram, a single wave six times larger than the six waves on the pri-
mary level and twice as large as the two waves on the intermediate level (cf.
fig. 19). The three-leveled structure thus generated is a more detailed ver-
sion of the simple graph (fig. 18B) and is analogous to a hexagram. When
this modular hierarchy is extended to further levels, this complex wave pre-
serves the relation of a single hexagram to the entire / Ching sequence, be-
coming part of a still larger hierarchy of which it is only 1/64 of the whole.
Each tri-leveled module exists as 1/64 of a still larger module. Such a com-
plex wave has at its primary level 384 parts in sixty-four primary subunits,

just as the complete / Ching sequence of sixty-four hexagrams has 384 yao.
We know that a duration of 384 days is nearly exactly thirteen lunar cycles.
Given this and the idea that organic macromolecules may have arisen in re-
sponse to periodicities in astrophysical forces, especially gravity, we suggest
that lunar cycles may have had a formative influence on the structural or-
ganization of the DNA. We also speculate that a cycle of lunar influences
of 384 days' duration may be a kind of natural calendar important to all life
that has evolved on earth. Such a 384-day lunar cycle would be a primary
cycle of biological importance and might be a subset in a hierarchy sixty-
four times larger than itself. We have called such a 384-day cycle a lunar
year and believe such a year to be but one level in a hierarchy of many lev-
els, each described by the wave of figure 19.

Such a hierarchy would require twenty-six levels to describe the totality
of temporal existence. Our assumption was that figure 19 is descriptive of
all, and any one, of these levels. When figure 19 is used as a 384-day lunar
calendar, each day is entirely under the hexagramatic influence of three
pairs of hexagrams, one part on each of the three levels. It is the influence
of smaller cycles on each level (cf. Table III, fig. 20) that adds the color,
tone, and feel to the experience of being, and it is these lesser scales and
the interphases between them that are responsible for those minute par-
ticulars that give life its depth and ambiguity and render a deterministic
prediction concerning a spatiotemporal moment impossible. General pre-
dictions based on larger time scales form the empirical basis of our investi-
gation of this sort of / Ching hierarchy and its relation to time.

A lunar year is a temporal process that forms a hexagram, a total energy
gestalt, in space-time. This form requires 6 X 64 days to complete, because
it is composed of six parts (lines or yao), each of which requires sixty-four
days to complete itself. Not only is a lunar year 1/64 of a larger cycle, which
is 1/64 of a still larger cycle (cf. Table I, fig. 16), but the lunar year is itself
composed of sixty-four parts, each described by the same complex wave
that models it. These hexagrams are of six days' duration. Such six-day
cycles are themselves wholes composed of sixty-four parts, each a replica of
the whole and so on down through shorter and shorter cycles until cycles
are reached whose duration is on the order of Planck's constant. Further
division of time cycles has no meaning for physics, and so it is here that di-
visions cease. It is at this level that the modular hierarchy has its ground
and origin. Our view is that various temporal levels are overtonal harmon-
ics of a quantum-mechanical flux of cyclical and irreducible temporal vari-
ables. If one entertains the idea that our universe may possess such a time
scheme, one is led to contemplate the problem of the nature and necessity

scheme, one is led to contemplate the problem of the nature and necessity
of the final time such a theory requires.

The eventual result of a self-enfolding of the temporal continuum at
levels of the hierarchy of long duration might be likened to a visible con-
densation of the hologram of mind expressed as a radiant image, a stand-
ing waveform. Organisms are involved in a process of endlessly refining
their cognition of the world. No final projection of the nature of this phe-
nomenon can be made, and, in fact, even though every statement is a part
of the truth, it is also very much defined by the boundary conditions
under which it was formulated. During the second century, the Alexan-
drian thinkers, specifically Clement, focused their attention, when dealing
with the Apocalypse, on the nature of the resurrection body; the question
of the time of the appearance of the Son of Man was deemed a matter of
lesser interest:

In that Great Day men will be reunited to their bodies. This is the
undoubted assurance of the Scripture. But it constituted one of
the great difficulties of the time. Christians were perplexed by it;
heathen controversialists poured upon it unmixed ridicule and
scorn. Origen, like Clement, found a solution of all his doubts in
the teaching of St. Paul; but he refined upon this in a way peculiar
to himself. The resurrection body will be the same that we now
inhabit, and yet not the same. Not the same because spiritual and
glorious, because again its material substance will be entirely dif-
ferent. Yet the same, as our body of today is the same with our
body of twenty years ago; every particle is changed, yet the body
as a whole is not changed. The soul has a vital assimilative spark
or principle, which lays hold of fitting matter, and shapes it into
a habitation suited to its needs. The same process by which it re-
pairs the daily waste of our organisms now will enable it then to
construct a wholly new tenament for itself. The Origenist monks
are said to have believed that the Resurrection Body would be
spherical, and this opinion is charged upon Origen by Justinian.
(Bigg 1913, pp. 271-272)

The theory of shared genetic memory and DNA bioelectronic reflec-
tion of its environment may yet yield sufficient data for a relatively clear
understanding of humanity's (and the shaman's) persistent intuition of an
afterlife and the collective transformation, which we suspect is imminent

and is creating the present shock of chaos at the end of history. The ques-
tion of the moment of this true rupture of plane is difficult; it seems most
millenarian speculations decode as giving critical importance to the age in
which they were composed.

In a modular hierarchy of space-time such as we propose, the total en-
ergy resident in the continuum can be supposed to be totally resident in
each resonant subset. This idea follows necessarily from the assumption of
organismic thought that the entire hierarchical continuum is resident in its
modular parts. The fold of temporal limitation and particularity that de-
fines a nexus of space-time is the place where modes of connection typical
of a higher spatial dimension ingress into the world of normal space-time.
That place is, in a sense, everywhere; that is, it is potentially anywhere. The
modules are members of a quantized, or discretely expressed, hierarchical
structure that on each level manifests the same form met in the primary
level. The problem of the moment of the involution of such a temporal hi-
erarchy into its short epochs is interesting. As moderns and necessarily
skeptics, we have assumed that although the hypothesis points toward an
eventual involution of the temporal manifold, a concrescence, there is little
likelihood of such an event occurring in the immediate present.

We believe space-time to be a flux of novelty whose variables are pre-
dictable. Using this supposition, we shall attempt to quantify the ebb and
flow of temporal parameters and, thus, to chart the future course of novel
ingressions into space-time (cf. Appendix). This is not, in principle, a dif-
ficult task. What is required is a logically coherent technique for assigning
a quantified value to every point in the modular hierarchy. Empirical in-
vestigation of a hypothesis of a flux of temporal parameters cannot go for-
ward until this is done. Quantification of every point in the hierarchy,
with the ideal and terminal state quantified as zero, would give a relative
scale of values. We used these relative values to map the intensity of nov-
elty's ingression into the history of space-time. We did this to research the
contention that this schema does map novelty's ingression into the real
world. Only through quantification can a consensus concerning the mean-
ing of the wave be achieved; otherwise, the wave and its interpretation are
no better than a mystical doctrine. We have achieved a quantification of
the wave through a set of operations that are at once logically rigorous and
at the same time preserve our intuitions concerning what the graph is. Our
attack on this problem began with an examination of the simple wave of
figure 18B.

Thirteen discrete line types comprise any simple version of the graph.
These thirteen lengths are displayed in figure 21. As these lengths are

always discrete units, we can assign to them values that are ascending inte-
gers. The values in figure 21 allow a quantification of line length. To quan-
tify the degree and direction of skew of individual lines, one direction of
skew is designated as positive, giving lines skewed in that direction posi-
tive values. Lines skewed in the opposite direction are given negative val-
ues. This gives values adequately preserving and quantifying line length
and direction of skew. The values labeled L in figure 21 are used for the
left side of a simple wave while the values labeled R, which are the same
values but with their sign reversed, are applied to the right side of any sim-
ple wave. Since the sign is important only in combining values across
scales but is ignored in the final graphing of combined values, either set of
values may be applied to either the right or left side. However, whichever
schema is chosen must then be followed throughout. Figure 22 represents
the version of the values of the simple graph that we have used.

It is important to note that the valuations in figure 22 are valuations of
the simple wave on the smallest scale of a single complex wave. The rela-
tive proportions of the three levels in the complex wave are preserved and

quantified by multiplying the valuations of the linear scale in the appro-
priate way. To assign a value to a position on the trigramatic scale, the val-
uation of that position on the linear scale (fig. 22) is multiplied by three
because the trigramatic scale is three times larger than the linear scale. In a
similar manner, the hexagramatic positions are assigned a valuation by
multiplying their linear-level valuations by six, again because the hexagra-
matic scale is six times larger than the linear. Figure 22 uses the value
scheme in figure 21 and is the version of value assignments we have used
in all our calculations.

Note that in figure 22 all parallel lines, regardless of the distances sepa-
rating them, reduce to zero. Thus, while the operations discussed so far
have allowed quantification of skew direction, proportional ratios of the
wave's parts, and the degree of departure from the parallel state, they have
not provided a quantified account of the fluctuating distances between the
two parameters of the wave. The procedure for obtaining these values is
similar to, but distinct from, the procedures outlined above.

Figure 23 shows the seven types of divergence, congruence, and overlap
that points in the simple wave may display. The two possible assignments
of positive and negative numbers are shown to the right and left sides in
figure 23. We have chosen to use the right-hand schema to preserve the
intuition that overlap tends to carry a situation toward the zero state
rather than away from it. Figure 24 shows the values this series of point as-
signments generates when applied to the simple wave. In figure 25 the val-
uation for skew, parallelism, and relative proportion have been combined
in the manner discussed above. The 384 positions and their corresponding
values are the quantification of the trileveled wave of figure 19. These
same values are graphed as a single line graph in figure 26. Figure 25,
which is the data base of figure 26, is the primary valuation scheme for
any complex wave, and the process of quantifying a given time in the
modular hierarchy of complex waves will necessarily begin with reference
to the values of figure 25.

Figure 26 graphs composite values for a single complex wave. These
values are displayed in figure 25. Figure 26 reduces the complex, trileveled,
bidirectionally flowing complex wave of figure 19 to a single line moving
in only one direction. Figure 26 preserves certain qualities of the complex
wave (fig. 19): its divergence from the zero state where lines are parallel,
the direction and degree of skew of pairs of lines, the relative proportions
of the three levels, and the distances between the fluctuating parameters of
the various component waves. Figure 26 does not reflect the shift of values
that would occur if the single-line complex wave were nested into a partic-

ular position in a modular hierarchy of complex waves, each level of
which was sixty-four times larger than its predecessor. In such a case, fig-
ure 26 would serve as a schema of values to be combined through super-
imposition with the values associated with whichever one of the sixty-four
segments of the next largest level it is to be nested in. These latter values
have first been multiplied by sixty-four, indicating their membership in
the next larger level in the hierarchy. Thus, sixty-four variants of figure 26
would be generated, and it is these variant waves that we have treated as
the temporal maps of a given historical span. The mathematical details of
the nesting of one level of the hierarchy in another have been imple-
mented in the Timewave Zero software. Peter Meyer has contributed a
mathematical formulation of the theory in the Appendix, pp. 211-220.
The components of the valuation of each of the 384 positions in figure 19
are shown in figure 25. The values displayed in figure 25 are the basis of
the quantified maps of temporal flux upon which rests this notion of a
fractal and hierarchical structure of time. Note that the order of the values
in figure 25 are the reverse of the order of the values as plotted in figure 26.

The last three of the 384 segments of the wave on any level possess sin-
gularities that quantify as zero (fig. 26, lower right corner). When the
wave on a given level enters those segments of itself that are zero states, it
ceases to contribute boundary constraints to its subsets on lower levels.
The cessation of boundary constraints imposed by higher levels in the hi-
erarchy causes a quantized drop toward the zero state each time that a
cycle enters its terminal phase on any level in the hierarchy. Such quan-
tized transitions from one modality to another are called changes of
epochs by Whitehead. The appearance of life in an inorganic world, of
consciousness in an unconscious world, or of language in a world without
language are all examples of such epochal transitions. Our lives are filled
with such transitions, but they are terminations of relatively short cycles
in the quantified hierarchy. Terminations of cycles or epochs of really long
duration cause extreme accelerations toward the zero state. This idea is
similar to Whitehead's conception of concrescence and the Vedic concep-
tion of world ages that grow shorter as they tighten around an axis point.
The spiral image of the Christian Apocalypse is another example of this
intuition that time is a series of tightening cycles around a quantized
transformation (cf. Cohn 1970).

A perfect, self-consistent proof that figure 26 does adequately conserve
four qualities—divergence from the zero state where lines are parallel, the
direction and the degree of skew of pairs of lines, distances between the
parameters of the component waves, and the proportions of these three

qualities relative to other levels—is afforded by comparing any two graph
segments assigned to a single time but on different scales relative to an ar-
bitrary termination date that is the same for both. Any two such segments
will be found to be similar in form yet preserving their relative propor-
tions. This demonstrable fact confirms the idea that the complex wave
(fig. 19) is adequately reflected and its useful values retained throughout
the series of operations that generate figure 26. What figure 26 achieves is
a clarity and simplicity of expression lacking in the trileveled complex
wave. Figure 26 is a quantification of operational constructs, which makes
this modular hierarchy of temporal variables a valid subject for rigorous
scientific investigation.

Chapter 11

The Temporal Hierarchy and Cosmology

Concrescence is Whitehead's term for the process that is any given actual
entity:

Concrescence is the growing together of the many into the unity
of a one . . . The initial phase of a concrescence is composed of
the separate feelings of the disjunctively diverse entities that make
up the actual world of the actual entity in question. Subsequent
phases effect the growing together, the concrescence, of these many
separate feelings into one unity of feeling, which is termed the sat-
isfaction of that actual entity. 'Concrescence' is the name for the
process in which the universe of many things acquires an individ-
ual unity in a determinate relegation of each item of the 'many to
its subordination in the constitution of the novel 'one' (PR 321).
With the attaining of its satisfaction an actual entity is completed
and perishes—i.e., it becomes a datum for fresh instances of con-
crescence. (Sherburne 1966, pp. 212-213)

The modular wave-hierarchy is described by an energy map of changes
running forward and backward upon themselves, much like an alternating
current (cf. fig. 19). Fung Yu-Lan (1947) has made clear the traditional
place this idea has long occupied in Chinese thought:

The content of the course of transformation in the universe is
a process of construction-plus-destruction in things. And this
process of construction-plus-destruction in things is the opening
and shutting referred to in the explanations of the Ch'ien and
the K'un. The constructive part of the process is equivalent to
the coming forward, the destructive part is equivalent to the
going away. A whole act of coming forward, plus a whole act
of going away, that is transformation. This going and coming has
no end to it, and just because this is so, therefore the universe is
without limit of time. Therefore it is said, the unceasing moving
one way and the other is designated as effective evolving. The
process is without limit, because what comes must go and what
goes must come back again: The advancing thing also retires and
the retiring thing comes back again. (p. 98)

We are attempting to make mathematically explicit a description of the
Tao that is no different from that proposed by the third-century Chinese
thinker Wang Pi:

What he [Wang Pi] was trying to describe was perhaps a series of
fields of force (as we might call them), contained in, but sub-
sidiary to, the main field of force of the Tao, and each manifesting
itself at different points in space and time. He believed that to
each of these there corresponded one of the hexagrams of the /
Ching, its sufficient characterization being given in the thuan or
explanation attached to it in the Book of Changes. In this way
man could know the most important dominant factors or root
causes of things, and feel able to affirm with unshakable faith
that though there was manifold complexity in the universe, there
was no confusion. (Needham 1954, vol. 1, p. 322)

In the West, the idea of the universe as arising from the ceaseless ebb
and flow of an underlying medium may be traced to Pythagoras and Her-
aclitus. Whitehead's organismic philosophy makes the same assumption:
... we shall conceive each primordial element as a vibratory ebb and
flow of an underlying energy, or activity (1967, p. 35). Whitehead has
nicely anticipated our turning to science for a judgment on the truth of
this view:

We must first ask whether there is any evidence to associate the
quantum theory with vibration. This question is immediately
answered in the affirmative. The whole theory centres round
the radiant energy from an atom, and is intimately associated
with the periods of the radiant wave-systems. It seems, therefore,
that the full hypothesis of essential vibratory existence is the
most hopeful way of explaining the paradox of the discontinuous
orbit. (1967, p. 36)

Like an electron or an organism, a spiral galaxy suggests itself as an ex-
pression on one level of the partially achieved state of concrescence. The
concrescence that our own small planet, a subunit in the hierarchy from
electron to galaxy, is now experiencing is of enormous importance to us as
a species, yet there is no certain fate to which we can entrust ourselves. The
self-evidence of the fact of freedom and its logical necessity for meaningful
thought means that no phenomenon functions with absolute mechanical

certainty. This is the fact, at once sobering and exhilarating, that quantum
physics has secured. It may be that the fate of evolution on earth, with its
escape, or no, from catastrophe, is of no concern to the larger universe,
much in the way that the death of millions of cells occurs in higher organ-
isms as a normal part of metabolism. This supremely rational idea finds
strong support in the existential myth, which Hans Jonas elaborates in
his essay on immortality. Our hypothesis is as rigorous and mathematical
as we can make it, yet all science springs from some myth; and Jonas
(1966) speaks eloquently of a myth that our own notion shares:

In the beginning, for unknowable reasons, the ground of being,
or the Divine, chose to give itself over to the chance and risk and
endless variety of becoming. And wholly so; entering into the
adventure of space and time, the deity held back nothing of itself;
no uncommitted or unimpaired part remained to direct, correct,
and ultimately guarantee the devious working-out of its destiny in
creation. On this unconditional immanence the modern temper
insists. It is its courage or despair, in any case its bitter honesty, to
take our being-in-the-world seriously: to view the world as left
to itself, its laws as brooking no interference, and the rigor of our
belonging to it as not softened by extramundane providence. The
same our myth postulates for God's being in the world. Not, how-
ever, in the sense of pantheistic immanence; if the world and God
are simply the same, the world at each moment and in each state
represents his fullness, and God can neither lose nor gain. Rather,
in order that the world might be, and be for itself, God renounced
his own being, divesting himself of his deity—to receive it back
from the Odyssey of time weighted with the chance harvest of
unforeseeable temporal experience; transfigured or possibly even
disfigured by it. In such self-forfeiture of divine integrity for the
sake of unprejudiced becoming, no other foreknowledge can
be admitted than that at possibilities which cosmic being offers in
its own terms: to these, God committed his cause in effacing him-
self for the world.

And for aeons his cause is safe in the slow hands of cosmic
chance and probability—while all the time we may surmise a
patient memory of the gyrations of matter to accumulate into an
ever more expectant accompaniment of eternity to the labors
of time—a hesitant emergence of transcendence from the opaque-
ness of immanence.

. . . And then he trembles as the thrust of evolution, carried by
its own momentum, passes the threshold where innocence ceases
and an entirely new criterion of success and failure takes hold of
the divine stake. The advent of man means the advent of knowl-
edge and freedom, and with this supremely double-edged gift the
innocence of the mere subject of self-fulfilling life has given way
to the charge of responsibility under the disjunction of good
and evil. To the promise and risk of this agency the divine cause,
revealed at last, henceforth finds itself committed; and its issue
trembles in the balance. The image of God, haltingly begun by
the universe, for so long worked upon—and left undecided—
in the wide and then narrowing spirals of pre-human time, passes
with this last twist, and with a dramatic quickening of the move-
ment, into man's precarious trust, to be completed, saved, or
spoiled by what he will do to himself and the world. And in this
awesome impact of his deeds on God's destiny, on the very com-
plexion of eternal being, lies the immortality of man.

With the appearance of man, transcendence awakened to itself
and henceforth accompanies his doings with the bated breath of
suspense, hoping and beckoning, rejoicing and grieving, approv-
ing and frowning—and, I daresay, making itself felt to him even
while not intervening in the dynamics of his worldly scene: for
can it not be that by the reflection of its own state as it wavers
with the record of man, the transcendent casts light and shadow
over the human landscape? (pp. 275-277)

If the wave model is a valid general theory of time, it should be possible
to show why certain periods or places have been particularly rich in events
that accelerate the creative advance into novelty, and also to show where
and when in the future such events might be expected to recur.

To carry out this operation, a personal computer has proven indispens-
able. A group of programs implementing these ideas has been written by
our colleague Peter Meyer. We call this program Timewave Zero.* This
software takes these theories and discoveries concerning the / Ching and
creates time maps based upon them. These time maps or novelty maps
show the ebb and flow of connectedness or novelty in any span of time
from a few days to tens of millennia. The theory is not deterministic; it

[* Timewave Zero is available in the Mac or MS/DOS environment from Dolphin Software, 48 Shat-
tuck Square #147, Berkeley, California 94704.]

does not say what will happen in the future, only the levels of novelty that
whatever happens will have to fulfill. As such it operates as a map, or sim-
plified picture, of the future (and past) behavior of whatever system is
being studied. At this point perhaps a picture is worth more than words,
so let us look therefore at figure 27 on page 172.

This is a novelty map of the eight thousand years that immediately pre-
cede the end of the Mayan Calendar on December 22, a.d. 2012. First let
me explain that we chose the end of the Mayan Calendar as the end date
for this graph because we found good agreement between the events that
comprise the historical record and the wave itself when this end date was
chosen. The end date is the point of maximized novelty in the wave and is
the only point in the entire wave that has a quantified value of zero. We
arrived at this particular end date without knowledge of the Mayan Cal-
endar, and it was only after we noticed that the historical data seemed to
fit best with the wave if this end date was chosen that we were informed
that the end date that we had deduced was in fact the end of the Mayan

Calendar.

In figure 27, and indeed in all the novelty maps, when the graph line
moves downward, novelty is assumed to be increasing. When there is
movement away from the base line, novelty is assumed to be decreasing in
favor of habitual forms of activity. Time is seen as the ebb and flow of two
opposed qualities: novelty versus habit, or density of connectedness versus
disorder. In figure 27 we see clearly that one trend toward greater novelty
reached its culmination around 2700 B.C., precisely at the height of the
Old Kingdom pyramid-building phase; then a countermovement toward
predictable forms of behavior asserted itself and increased in importance
until around 900 B.C. At that time, around the time of the consolidation
of Mycenaean sea power, the tendency toward habituation was overcome
and replaced by a long cascade into greater and greater novelty that reaches
its culmination early in the twenty-first century.

The career of novelty is revealed to be a process that is punctuated by
subprocesses. These mitigate, modify, and influence an overall general ten-
dency toward greater and greater novelty. Notice that the last fifteen hun-
dred years of figure 27 are highly novel times that have played themselves
out at levels of novelty very close to the horizontal axis, the maximized
zero state. Let us look at those last fifteen hundred years more closely.

Figure 28 is a graph full of precise predictions that to my mind demon-
strate the force of Timewave Zero. The thing to notice is the very precise
way in which episodes of historical advance or novelty are precisely indi-
cated by steep descents in the wave. Such agreement between the historical

FIGURE 27

8012 years, from 6000 B.C. to a.d. 2012. In figures 27 through 30 the values on
the left of each graph are a numerical quantification of novelty. The maximum
novel situation has a value of zero; hence, values tend toward zero as the end
date is approached. In these graphs the end date is assumed to be December 21, A.D. 2012.

record and the ebb and flow of the wave argues strongly that the Timewave
is in fact able to accurately portray the evolution of historical patterns of
change.

The theory of time that is implied by the Timewave is a theory of time
as a fractal, or self-similar, wave. Fractals have recently come into vogue in
many branches of the natural sciences, and the reader wishing a thorough
exposition of this new area of mathematics should consult Benoit Man-
delbrot's The Fractal Geometry of Nature. A fractal wave comes quite natu-
rally equipped with an extensive set of internal resonances that show a
formal, but acausal, linkage between events and periods of time that may
be widely separated from each other in space and time. So, for example,
when we look at events of the one hundred years leading up to the Mayan
calendrical termination, we see that the graph is topologically similar to
the graph that we said applied to the past several thousand years. My in-
terpretation of this is that it means that shorter duration subsets of the

FIGURE 28

1512 years, from a.d. 500 to a.d. 2012. The oscillatory character of historical nov-
elty from the Fall of Rome until the European Enlightenment is clearly visible.

fractal curve of time are microversions of the larger pattern in which they
are embedded. Such an idea lays the basis for understanding such phe-
nomena as fads, fashion, and the occasional wave of historical obsession
that characterize society; for example, see figure 29.

Notice that with figure 29 we leave the realm of modeling of past his-
torical events and move into the area of prophecy proper, for a portion of
figure 29 actually refers to a portion of time that has yet to undergo the
formality of actually occurring. Let us zero in on the point in which the
wave passes out of the past and into the future (fig. 30).

Here we see twenty years, with December 19, 1989, in the middle. Ulti-
mately it is in the mind of the reader to decide, based on his or her own
knowledge and feeling, whether the wave descriptions of the portions of
the twentieth century that we are all living through are correctly mapped
by Timewave Zero.

Timewave Zero is an exploratory idea system and a software package
that runs on personal computers. It is the broadcast output of the natu-
rally superconducting experimental deoxyribonucleic matrix transceiver

FIGURE 29

63 years, from January 1950 to December a.d. 2012.

operating in hyperspace. We believe that by using such ideas as a compass
for the collectivity, we may find our way back to a new model in time to
reverse the progressive worldwide alienation that is fast turning into an
eco-cidal planetary crisis. A model of time must give hope and overcome
entropy in its formal composition. In other words, it must mathematically
secure the reasonableness of hope. This theory, and indeed the mathemati-
cal theory of dynamic systems generally, does this by securing in a formal
manner the process by which transformation can naturally arise and per-
sist out of a background of flux.

It becomes increasingly clear that we are now experiencing a similar pe-
riod marked with extreme density of novel ingressions, a time when the
rational and acausal tendencies inherent in time may again reverse their
positions of dominance.

The stupendous idea of an end of time is an attempt to negate the
eternal stasis, to break the circle. All peoples who have awakened to
the suffering and hope of the condition humaine have arrived at this
idea. The magnificent image of the Norse ragnarok... is perhaps

FIGURE 29

63 years, from January 1950 to December a.d. 2012.

operating in hyperspace. We believe that by using such ideas as a compass
for the collectivity, we may find our way back to a new model in time to
reverse the progressive worldwide alienation that is fast turning into an
eco-cidal planetary crisis. A model of time must give hope and overcome
entropy in its formal composition. In other words, it must mathematically
secure the reasonableness of hope. This theory, and indeed the mathemati-
cal theory of dynamic systems generally, does this by securing in a formal
manner the process by which transformation can naturally arise and per-
sist out of a background of flux.

It becomes increasingly clear that we are now experiencing a similar pe-
riod marked with extreme density of novel ingressions, a time when the
rational and acausal tendencies inherent in time may again reverse their
positions of dominance.

The stupendous idea of an end of time is an attempt to negate the
eternal stasis, to break the circle. All peoples who have awakened to
the suffering and hope of the condition humaine have arrived at this
idea. The magnificent image of the Norse ragnarok... is perhaps

FIGURE 30

20 years, from January 1980 to January a.d. 2000.

its most radical form. But, each in its own way, the other peoples
who have created a world for themselves have also appointed an
end to it; Indians, Persians, Greeks, Arabs, and Jews. . . Thus the
prophet Zacharias can say that it will be light at eventide. This
final time revolutionizes the course of the world.

The irruption of a time that is impossible, of an event that falls
out of the cycle—we are familiar with this notion, from the fishes
that remain hanging on the limbs of the trees in the Deucalion,
to the mountain that is transplanted into the sea in the sermon of
Jesus. (Van Der Leeuw, in Campbell 1967, pp. 338, 340)

Gnostic intuitions of the first and second century suggested that energy
is the divine light that is trapped in matter and that energy, in order to
free itself, must evolve itself through progressively subtler stages until it
generates self-reflecting consciousness, which can then evolve techniques
for freeing all energy from matter. Like this myth, all ideas of salvation, en-
lightenment, or Utopia may be taken to be expressions in consciousness of
the drive of energy to free itself from the limitations of three-dimensional

space and return to the Father, that is, return to the uncontaminated
essence of itself in an epoch of realized concrescent satisfaction. Concres-
cent satisfaction includes the notion of energy unbounded by space or
time. This means for our theory that at especially low-value regions of the
modular wave-hierarchy a quantum jump should occur in the concrescent
process.

What this advance of novelty is, and what the process of becoming may
be seen to be in essence, is the revelation of the interspecies' mind. In
human beings, it is approached through the nonmetabolizing neural
DNA scattered through the body, and for humans it becomes apparent as
a higher cortical phenomenon, an experience, as a confrontation with the
Jungian collective unconscious. This revelation and its integration into
the field of shared experience is a process of transformation of the previ-
ously limited ego. The many magnitudes of duration in which the levels
of the modular hierarchy of waves can be supposed to be operable exceed,
at both ends of the scale, any physical processes known to occur in the
universe. These magnitudes or cosmic epochs are shown in figure 20,
Table III. For example, the time during which 1/2 of the hydrogen is con-
sumed in the thermonuclear reaction H2 + H2 — He + n is approximately
.00003 second, that is, of the same magnitude as the .000048 figure for
the thirteenth cycle projected in the wave model. Similarly, the age of
matter in the universe is now tentatively placed at 1.5 X 10[to the 10th power] years; our
final figure on the macroscale is nearly five times larger than this, but we
suggest that the first nearly 3 X 10[to the 10th power] (30 billion) years were simply passed
with diffuse primal hydrogen (and perhaps antihydrogen) entering the
space-time continuum very gradually. In any case, some 15 billion years
ago, matter began to gather in sufficiently dense aggregates to give rise to
the temperatures, pressures, and magnetic fields necessary for star forma-
tion. In the light of these time scales and events, the cosmogonic myth ar-
gued for becomes the following.

Nearly 36 billion years ago, almost twice as long as the age that modern
astrophysics supposes to be the age of the universe, the set of mutually reflec-
tive relations that constitute the paired universe of matter and antimatter
began to enter and, thereby, define three-dimensional space. Following a
major shift of epochs, hydrogen began to appear spontaneously near the cen-
ter of the spatial topology. Denser atomic materials followed in due course;
first helium, via the Critchfield formula for H-H fusion, which can proceed
in pure hydrogen. All of these material entities spring at their point of origin
from the same source as the topological manifold of space, that is, from a
higher spatial dimension. Why a higher spatial dimension is ingressing at an

ever-accelerating rate into space-time we shall perhaps not understand until
we achieve, through a concrescence of time, a return to the higher topologi-
cal dimension. We in this case means the interspecies' network of DNA
shared by all life. As in Jonas's myth, deity thus achieves a redefining and
clarifying of the nature of itself through the efficacy of its works. Whatever
the reasons energy entered space-time, each expression of itself in time has
taken the form of a further sophistication of organization. The path of re-
turn sought by evolution on all levels is through antientropic organization.
The original particles, which began entering the space-time continuum
some 36 billion years ago, had, by 12 billion years ago, given rise to the epoch
of the primal aggregate of the Big Bang theory, although the great majority
of stars are less than 5 billion years old. This wave-hierarchy theory of time
manages to avoid some of the dualisms inherent in the Steady State of Big
Bang schools of cosmological theory, since it offers a mechanism by which
an entire universe can spring into existence and yet not violate any physical
laws while doing so. In its general outlines, the cosmology that our theory
has built into it is in accord with recent ideas put forth by Edward Tryon.
Both his model and ours predict a universe that is homogeneous, isotropic,
and closed and consists equally of matter and antimatter. All of these con-
tentions are consistent with, and supported by, the present state of astro-
physics. We have proposed that quantum-mechanical phenomena organize
matter at every level; Tryon (1973) suggests that the universe itself is a very
large instance of a quantum-mechanical phenomenon that is a common-
place when of brief duration. Tryon points out that universes can spring
from nothing without violations of physical law so long as they have specific
properties. Chief among these is the requirement that such a universe must
have a zero net value for all conserved quantities. The quantities that physics
considers conserved fall into two categories, continuous and discrete. It is the
discrete quantities that characterize the elementary particles: spin, strange-
ness, electric charge, and so on. These quantities have equal magnitude, but
opposed signs, in the case of particles and antiparticles. All that die laws of
discrete conservation imply, therefore, is that if a universe appears from
nowhere, it must consist equally of matter and antimatter. It is very possible
that we live in a universe that possesses zero net values for all of its conserved
quantities. Such a universe could well have sprung from nothing:

To indicate how such a creation might have come about, I refer
to quantum field theory, in which every phenomenon that could
happen in principle actually does happen occasionally in
practice, on a statistically random basis. For example, quantum

The universe is subject to cycles of temporal variables, occurring on
many levels and generating appropriate forms of novelty on each such
level. Life's epoch began one to two billion years ago—1.3 billion years on
our scale. Eighteen million years ago brings one to the closure of the next
smallest level. This occurred at the height of the age of mammals. One
sixty-fourth of this 18-million-year cycle is a cycle whose inception was

275,000 years ago, a time that corresponds well with the emergence of
Homo sapiens. One sixty-fourth of this cycle brings us to the cycle that
epitomizes what might properly be called historical time, that cycle which
began 4,300-plus years ago, around 2300 B.C. The duration of the cycle
next encountered is 67-plus years, and we have assumed the most recent
such epoch to have begun in 1945. The end of World War II and the de-
velopment of atomic weapons and their use in war are forms of novelty
whose appearance attended the shift of epochs that created the postmod-
ern world. If our understanding is correct, then this same 67-plus—year
cycle at, or near, the end of a 4,300-year cycle will terminate around the
year 2012 (cf. fig. 27).

Language and its appearance is a recent instance of concrescence. It is a re-
cent form of novelty, having been in existence not more than a million
years. As a concrescence occurring in our species, it may provide a clue to
the path that evolving human novelty will take in the future. In the case of
language elaboration, we have an excellent example of the way in which
what must first have been a freakish mutational ability became overnight a
species-transforming novelty, emerging from the foundation of mam-
malian organization. We suggest that the unique mode of being that lan-
guage represents may have become manifest as follows.

Human beings must have discovered the use of fire shortly after acquir-
ing prehensile thumbs. Certainly evidence argues that humans possessed
fire long before the first tools were made. Once the discovery of fire was
made, the element necessary for humanity's correct intervention in en-
ergy's struggle to free itself was present. With the introduction of fire into
the Homo sapiens community, the stage was set for the invocation of the
logos. Around their fires, humans dragged the carcasses of the hunt and
the plants that the group deemed useful as food or fuel. It is reasonable to
suggest that in this coincidence of plants, bone tubes emptied of their
marrow, fire, and the restless prehensile hands of early humans, eventually
the peculiar psychological states attendant upon the smoking of trypta-
mines, or the MAO inhibitors occurring in the same biosynthetic chain,
would be discovered. In describing Australopithecus, a human ancestor,
Lord Ritchie-Calder (1961) says, They lived in limestone caves and there
is evidence they may have used fire . . . they appear to have been carnivo-
rous, because in the caves there are animal bones . . . and antelope limb
bones. These antelope bones are interesting because they have been
smashed to extract the marrow (p. 43). Recent excavations at Non Nok
Tha in Thailand indicate that one of the most technologically advanced

cultures in the world of 13,000 B.C. existed there. The graves at Non Nok
Tha yielded the bones of Bos indicus, the Indian zebu. The manure of this
species of cattle is the preferred environment of Colombian varieties of
Stropharia cubensis mushrooms.

Once any hallucinogenic effect were discovered, it would, as it repre-
sents contact with a tremendum, be surrounded with ritual. This usually
means dancing and, especially important for our argument, singing and
chanting. Once ritual use of a tryptamine-containing plant is exercised in
the presence of vocal sound, the chemical basis for spontaneous seizures of
unconsciously modulated sound and its signification of a tremendum
would be present. The beginning of language may be such glossalialike
phenomena. Shortly after such practice found even slight usage, one
could expect that the correct union of signed sound and cognitive cate-
gory would occur, and language, as the prototype of a more perfect ar-
chetypal logos, would be discovered—discovered within the confines of
ritual, a kind of preconscious understanding of the requirements of energy
for its transformation and liberation. Following the acquisition of lan-
guage, the advance into novelty, now in part self-reflecting, continued on
a higher level. The most recent of these major new levels of coordinated
organization may be embodied in the epoch of electronic communica-
tions and the furiously evolving postrelativistic consciousness of the twen-
tieth century.

Language is the embodiment of meaning. Meaning signifies organiza-
tion, and there is no organization without purpose. What is the purpose
of organization? Is it perhaps to retard entropy? In such a case, the mean-
ing of meaning for that which apprehends meaning is the necessity to
purposefully create and maintain order. Note retard , not reverse ; ac-
cording to the Second Law of Thermodynamics, entropy cannot be re-
versed; in localized areas, however, it may cease temporarily. In organisms
this situation occurs, and it also occurs in low-temperature systems that
mutate to states of higher order instead of going over into disorder.
Transference of the properties of microevents occurring in quantum-
mechanical systems to macrosystems, a phenomenon exhibited by super-
fluids, might, if found to have a wider occurrence in nature, offer some
explanation for the emergence of natural levels of order. Research has al-
ready shown that in some biological processes microphysical events are
decisive (cf. Prigogine et al. 1972).

Chapter 12

Toward a Physics of Concrescence

The story of the evolution of physics in the twentieth century is the story
of the elaboration and acceptance of a wave-mechanical conception of the
primary nature of matter. No model of matter can fail to take into ac-
count that contemporary physics has recaptured a Pythagorean intuition
too long forgotten by the followers of the commonsense physics of New-
ton. Common sense is gone from physics; Planck banished it when he dis-
covered the discrete nature of radiation, and Heisenberg's Principle of
Uncertainty made a return to the notion of simple location forever impos-
sible. Our own theory is thoroughly kymatic, or wavelike.

The parallels between the classic behavior of waves and the graphs we
have elaborated is interesting because they seem to argue strongly that
there is no inconsistency involved in discussing the modular hierarchy we
propose in wave-mechanical terms. One model of wave activity that has
found acceptance in quantum mechanics is that of French physicist Prince
Louis de Broglie. The accepted understanding of de Broglie's wave is that
the highest intensity of these waves at any point of the space to which
they are confined gives us the probability of finding the electron at that
particular point if we carry out a special experiment designed for that pur-
pose. They are so to speak 'waves of probability' (Gamow 1964, p. 57). It
is interesting that the modular hierarchy of the / Ching also is a wave of
probability, and that if the electron is conceived of as a concrescence,
then, naturally, at the point of maximum symmetry (the zero state) of the
wave, one might expect its appearance. Such a theory would have clear ap-
plication to atomic physics if the various quantum states met within the
atom could be shown to be determined by zero, or near zero, states (max-
imum symmetries) within the short epochs of the / Ching hierarchy. The /
Ching wave and the postquantum atom may not really possess distinct
particularity. The property of the / Ching wave-hierarchy, determination
of morphology through ingression of temporal variables, may simply rep-
resent a description of a set of laws operating within the atom but previ-
ously ignored. Modern physics is haunted by a plentitude of particles; an
elegant theory should reduce such particles to a coherent substratum.

In The Ambidextrous Universe, Gardner (1964) observes:

The positron was the first anti-particle to be discovered. Every
elementary particle is now known to have a corresponding

anti-particle. The two particles are alike in all respects except that
they are opposite in the sign of any quantity (represented by a plus
or minus quantum number) that is conserved ... In other words
all conserved quantities must be of opposite sign so that when the
particle and anti-particle come together, these quantities will can-
cel each other, leaving nothing but pure energy (photons). In the
case of the photon and the neutral pi-meson, particle and anti-
particle are one and the same. (p. 211)

He speaks of . . . entertaining examples of mutual annihilation by a
left-right encounter. In most cases the two structures involved are helices
of opposite handedness (Gardner 1964, p. 250). In this vein we refer to
C. H. Hinton's (1887) speculation:

If we consider a twist and its image, they are but the simplest
and most rudimentary type of organism. What holds good of
a twist and its image twist would hold good of a more compli-
cated arrangement also. If a bit of structure apparently very unlike
a twist, and with manifold parts and differences in it—if such a
structure were to meet its image structure, each of them would
instantly unwind the other, and what was before a complex and
compound whole, opposite to an image of itself, would at once be
resolved into a string of formless particles. A flash, a blaze, and all
would be over. (p. 172)

We have speculated that the vacuum fluctuation of space-time is a
holographic modular hierarchy whose individual levels possess properties
in common with the King Wen sequence of the / Ching and the morphol-
ogy of DNA. We have suggested that within this hierarchy time could,
though hologramatically homogenized, be said to be moving in two op-
posed directions. Hinton and others, in trying to imagine a hypothetical
meeting between human and antihuman, or galaxy and antigalaxy, always
conceive the meeting as occurring in normal, three-dimensional space,
and thus necessarily entailing a point of first contact and an approach or
closure of linear distance in three dimensions. This sort of meeting of
matter and antimatter can only result in a violent, complete, and spatially
localized energy conversion, which is not particularly interesting. We can
suppose that in such a case the Leidenfrost phenomenon would act to in-
hibit the reaction. This phenomenon is named after the German physi-
cian who studied it during the nineteenth century. As a drop on a hot

surface evaporates, a layer of steam forms between the drop and the sur-
face; this insulates the drop and appreciably slows its evaporation. The
analogy between this phenomenon and events likely to follow upon a
meeting of matter and antimatter has already been suggested by Hans
Alfven (1966):

The first contact between koinomatter and antimatter will result
in annihilation, but the attendant generation of energy will create
a force that separates the two. In the Leidenfrost phenomenon
... a layer of steam is formed between the drop and the plate. In
our more ambitious experiment, a layer is similarly formed to sep-
arate the koinomatter and antimatter. Reasoning by analogy, we
may expect this to bring about an annihilation that is relatively
slow and small in scale. It need not be more intensive than to
ensure the formation and maintenance of an adequate insulating
layer. (p. 52)

If, however, instead of a three-dimensional approach of an object and its
antimatter reflection, we imagine that these two universes were never spa-
tially distinct, but rather were somehow coextensive in space-time (one oc-
cupying a higher spatial dimension than the other), each the antimatter
image of the other, and each existing in holographic matrices that confer
spatiotemporal ubiquity to all of the contents of each, then it is possible to
imagine a meeting between universe and antiuniverse, which would have a
much more profound effect than simple annihilation. Such a meeting
could only occur across the complete topology of the entire space-time
continuum (or across the topology of an astronomical macrostructure, like
a galaxy, if the topology of space-time is discontinuous over extragalactic,
or extraclustral, distances). The meeting of a material matrix possessing
hologramatic properties and its antimatter reflection would result, it is
true, in mutual annihilation of both matrices, but not in the sort of local-
ized explosion that would ensue from their meeting in three dimensions.
Rather, the annihilation through mutual cancellation would occur at every
point in both matrices simultaneously, something impossible in a three-
dimensional collision, where Leidenfrost's effect would impede the reac-
tion. The meeting of antimatter and its reflection in normal space seems
unlikely, since both kinds of matter, the particles to build such matter at
any rate, have already been detected right here on earth. Were a collision
in normal space to occur between two universes, one of matter and one of
antimatter, the reaction (since it would represent a total energy conversion)

would possess, as the surface of its expanding spherical shock wave, fusion
processes that would accomplish the initial plasmization of matter caught
in the expanding reaction; the partial energy release, represented by the fu-
sion processes, would itself be converted in the matter/antimatter reaction
moving behind it. The matter/antimatter interphase would occur in a plas-
mic atmosphere of free ions; matter in modes of organization that occur
outside the fission process would not be generated by the expanding total
energy conversion reaction.

A very different situation would occur were the collision of the two con-
tinua to occur in the hologramatic kind of spatiotemporal organization we
are suggesting may exist. In such a situation, the mutual annihilation of
both continua would occur simultaneously at all points in both matrices.
Only photons would be left, and they would presumably retain the struc-
ture they had possessed as matter, and its stereoisomeric reflection in anti-
matter. This idea of an event occurring simultaneously throughout the
four-dimensional space-time continuum is at variance with the assumptions
of relativity. Nevertheless, Whitehead (1967) preserves this concept in his
philosophy, and following him, we have preserved it in our methodology:

It only remains to add that Einstein would probably reject the
theory of multiple space-time systems which I have been ex-
pounding to you. He would interpret his formula in terms of
contortions in space-time which alter the invariance theory for
measure properties, and of the proper times of each historical
route. His mode of statement has the greater mathematical sim-
plicity, and only allows of one law of gravitation, excluding the
alternative. But, for myself, I cannot reconcile it with the given
facts of our experience as to simultaneity, and spatial arrangement.
There are also other difficulties of a more abstract character.
(p. 122)

It is possible to suggest that relativistic effects are operating within each
wave-particle conceived as a four-dimensional space-time continuum, but
that the equations of relativity should be inserted within those equations,
descriptive of the properties of holographic matrices: convolutional inte-
grals and Fourier transformations.

In trying to imagine this meeting of universes, we should abandon the
idea of a localized explosion and imagine, instead, a universe whose phys-
ical laws suddenly cease to operate—as matter and antimatter achieve si-
multaneous, ubiquitous cancellation—leaving, in the wake of the closure

of the vacuum fluctuation, the photonic forms existing and able for the
first time to obey laws relevant to themselves as photonic holograms
(forms), rather than as photonic holograms expressed through matter or
antimatter, as objects or antiobjects. Such a process, though farfetched,
would utilize a set of naturally occurring phenomena (vacuum fluctua-
tions and higher dimensional matrices) to create the sort of basic ontolog-
ical mutation in the nature of matter such as, we suggest, may characterize
some future shift of epochs. The photonic shell, left in the wake of fourth-
dimensional merging of holograms of matter, and of antimatter, may be
the key to a clearer understanding of the archetype of a paradisiacal exis-
tence at time's end. The spiral implosion of time may entail the universe,
and every entity in it, meeting and canceling its antimatter double to cre-
ate, through this union of opposites, an ontological mutation from matter
to photonic form, which represents tremendous freedom.

Myth anticipates these ideas in the Mandaean conception of the soul as
a light double, which exists in a higher dimension, and which one meets
after death (cf. Drower 1962). If such a meeting between our universe and
its reflection could be imagined to be possible in some not-so-distant fu-
ture, relative to the age of the universe, then the existence of life and self-
reflecting consciousness could be seen as emergent properties that are a
natural consequence of the temporal flow of a universe that has entered the
short epochs that precede a final concrescence. We see the experiment at
La Chorrera as part of a tapping in on a growing sense of the imminence of
a major shift of epochs on some level that must be stirring in many species
and individuals. In our experiment, an intuition of such a possible change
was achieved through techniques bioelectronic and shamanic, whose reve-
lation, through a transpersonal zeitgeist-like phenomenon, marks a form of
election. If the theory of the bonding of harmine into nucleic acids (briefly,
while metabolizing, or permanently, through audilely induced bonds) is
correct, and if the resulting signal or shift in metabolic mode were to be
found to effect and restructure higher cortical processes, we would be on
the way to validating intimations that an epoch-terminating event, long in
the making and critical to the creative continuation of human evolution, is
at last coming to fruition. The investigations at La Chorrera then emerge
as fortuitous events made possible by a correct use of free will in the light
of the constraints inherent in the present epoch.

Certainly, if a partial concrescence is achieved in a three-dimensional
focus, then the temporal continuum of normal space-time will be unaf-
fected and continue. Any partial concrescence would leave intact a contin-
uum of successive events, and as investigators of this phenomenon, it is up

to us to anticipate these successive events. Although each time is an over-
tonal harmonic of other moments, there is a thread of creative advance
running through time along the helix of closure represented by life's ap-
proach to new epochs. The quantified hierarchy (cf. figs. 27 through 30 in
chap. 11 and fig. 32 in the Epilogue) appears to describe the vicissitudes of
past history with some accuracy, but the same description gives such a piv-
otal role to the twentieth century that reason dictates skepticism. The crit-
ical role of our own era is a fact only if the assumption of the cyclical,
ever-condensing nature of time is correct. If time is an eternal process, then
it may be open-ended or cyclical, but not the latter in such a way as to ever
yield the actual concrescence this idea calls for. That could happen only if
the temporal cycles were to constantly shorten themselves around a tempo-
ral axis. The idea of an axis time is common to Continental theology:

We write: Anno Domini 1951. This means that we measure time
from a centre. This centre determines the time that follows it, and
the time which preceded it strove toward this centre. Our histori-
cal numbering of the years tacitly presupposes a caesura between
the era before the birth of Christ and the era which came after it.
Our history is oriented toward a centre. (Quispel, in Campbell
1967, p. 85)

Such a leading of energy toward a center can only end in transforma-
tion. What the temporal axis is like, as an experience, has been the contin-
uing puzzle of our experiment and of much of human history:

Of final time itself we see nothing. There is only God . . . Here
all dimensions are effaced, including the fourth dimension, of
time. But the biblical concept of eternity is no abstract timeless-
ness, no aeternitas, but a me olam ad olam. Final time begins in the
midst of historical time. In the New Testament as elsewhere it is
announced to the peoples by omens—adunata and wonders. But
it also sets its stamp upon time. In the ancient world, including
Egypt, there was an eschatological schema, according to which
a time of decline and despair heralded the advent of final time.
The historical events were read into this schema, as conversely
the event that seceded from time was read into history. (Van Der
Leeuw, in Campbell 1967, pp. 348-349)

The moment of concrescence may occupy the same position with
respect to time that a magnetic pole of the earth occupies relative to the
geomagnetic field of the planet. Like the poles, which are physically char-
acterized by climatological extreme, the temporal pole would mark a tem-
poral extreme, the most extreme moment of density of the ingression of
novelty, but like the poles, it would not be apparently different from its
space-time environment. Such an understanding of time would mean no
definitive concrescence could take place.

Our theory is one of a progressive spiral involution of time toward a
concrescence, rather than a theory of a static hierarchy of waves, eternally
expressed on many levels. This is because the terminal positions in the
King Wen wave naturally quantify as zero states. The natural consequence
of this is that the terminal sections of an epoch do not contribute to the
valuation assigned to lower levels of that particular section of the hierar-
chy. This results in a progressive drop of valuations toward the zero state
as any epoch enters its terminal phase. Only in the situation of final con-
crescence does the valuation on all levels actually become zero. In fact, the
quantified definition of absolute concrescence is that it is the zero point in
the quantified wave-hierarchy.

The paradox of the concrescence is that as one approaches it, one be-
comes more free, but through recognition of the boundary conditions of
that modality into which one is becoming absorbed. Once concrescence is
achieved, ego and Tao are perceived as one, or rather, only Tao is per-
ceived, but as though it were ego.

The final phase in the process of concrescence, constituting an
actual entity, is one complex, fully determinate feeling. This final
phase is termed satisfaction. It is fully determinate (a) as to its
genesis, (b) as to its objective character for the transcendent cre-
ativity, and (c) as to its prehension—positive or negative— of
every item in its universe. (Whitehead 1969, pp. 30-31)

A persistently recurring idea concerning a sudden apparent suspension
of natural laws is the assumption, which the / Ching also makes, that nat-
ural laws are not eternal absolutes, but rather flux phenomena that oper-
ate over long periods of time. Though it is commonly assumed that
human time is cosmically insignificant in terms of duration, actually this
does not appear to be the case. Whitehead (1968) notes that . . . span of

existence is merely relative to our habits of human life. For inframolecular
occurrence, a second is a vast period of time (p. 157). When a span of
human time is compared not only to the varieties of duration persisting in
the macrocosm but to those in the physical microcosm as well, where
magnitudes like .655 X 10[to the negative 27th power] erg seconds are met with (cf. fig. 20, Table
III, in chap. 10), the position of humanly cognizable time among the
classes of time necessary for the functioning of the physical universe is
more correctly seen to rest in the middle; so that from the standpoint of a
temporally deconditioned and impartial observer, the appearance of life in
the last few seconds of a cosmic hour of creation is equally as unlikely as,
given the self-evident existence of life, the appearance of consciousness in
the closing seconds of yet another cosmic hour devoted to the career of
life. Each of these acts, with deus ex machina endings, must be seen objec-
tively as being no less improbable than that in the closing seconds of an
Act III, the curtain might be rung down by a concrescent transformation
that would fulfill the equation life is to nonlife as consciousness is to life as
X is to consciousness. One point more: These three propositions are not
really equally improbable. Given the first, the second is more likely; given
the first and second, the third grows almost necessary.

Achievement of the zero state can be imagined to arrive in one of two
forms. One is the dissolution of the cosmos in an actual cessation and un-
raveling of natural laws, a literal apocalypse. The other possibility takes
less for granted from the mythologems associated with the collective
transformation and entry into concrescence and hews more closely to the
idea that concrescence, however miraculous it is, is still the culmination of
a human process, a process of toolmaking, which comes to completion in
the perfect artifact: the monadic self, exteriorized, condensed, and visible
in three dimensions; in alchemical terms, the dream of a union of spirit
and matter. Presumably, were such a hyperspatial tool/process discovered,
in a very short time it would entirely restructure life's experience of itself,
of time, space, and of otherness, and then it would be these effects which
would follow rather than precede the concrescence, and which, through
their atemporal influence on the content of visionary experience, would
be seen to have given rise to the apocalyptic scenario in the expectation
of so many ontologies. The appearance in normal space-time of a hyper-
dimensional body, obedient to a simultaneously transformed and resur-
rected human will, and able to plumb the obligations and opportunities
inherent in this unique juncture in energy's long struggle for self-
liberation, may be apocalypse enough.

What we now require is an empirically verifiable experimental confirma-
tion of the idea of a modular wave-hierarchy in time, or of the importance
of nucleic acid ESR for consciousness. The quest for such experiments may
prove elusive for the following reason: The dependence of scientific meth-
odology upon inductive thought has caused it to construct its rules of ad-
missible evidence against the admission of phenomena that cannot be
repeatedly triggered by experimental means. Against this point of view,
which assumes the absolute homogeneity of time, our own theory assumes
at its very heart that time itself is a medium of variables in flux, and that as
such, every moment is different from every other moment. This is actually
a more consistently conservative position than science's logically un-
founded use of induction. Nevertheless, this position holds out the possi-
bility that, unless we are able to exactly determine and predict the temporal
boundary conditions operating in a given moment, we may not be able to
devise an experimental procedure that would effectively prove or disprove
this theory. Elimination of inductive assumptions, and formulation of
clear and quantified definitions of the boundary conditions inherent in the
waveform, is only part of the problem. We must also understand that, even
if the wave theory of time is correct, we would find it difficult, if not im-
possible, to prove, unless we had chosen a temporal moment of major con-
crescence from which to generate the wave. Only in such rare cases would
the wave conform to observed experience on every temporal level of the
hierarchy.

Even in the case of a major or final concrescence, confirmation would
not occur in a 72-billion-year cycle that had these condensing subcycles
operable until the last four days, or, more probably, until the last several
hours of the cycle. Figure 20, Table III, makes clear why this is so. We sug-
gest that each cycle has within itself revelatory intervals where, in gar-
bled, or distorted, form, intuitions of the species' history-culminating
entry into concrescence emerges into the conscious collective life of the
psyche to fertilize idea systems in formation there. Such intervals are
quantifiable as low-value approaches to an ideal zero state. Figure 32, in
the Epilogue, displays the values of Frame 384. Frame 384 is the terminal
frame in the hierarchy of sixty-four-nested cycles, each with 384 variables.
As such, it represents the last epoch on any level; it maps the epoch imme-
diately preceding concrescence on any level. Does it describe the ingres-
sion of novelty into history since 2300 B.C.? We submit not only that it
does but that Frame 384 also graphs the ingression of novelty into our
own epoch, from 1945 to 2012.

It is difficult to imagine a universally pleasing method of comparing
two distinct historical events against each other and against a quantified
scale of their respective degrees of advancement into novelty. This being
so, comparison between the 4,306-year scale and the current 67-plus—year
cycle, with resulting judgments concerning the degree to which the two
may complement, and reflect, each other, must rest purely and finally in
the mind of the beholder. If the relation between the 4,306-year cycle and
the 67-plus—year cycle were established, so too would be an idea implicit
in this, that the terminal 67-plus—year cycle contains, condensed and in-
tensified, all the themes and changes of the 4,306-year cycle. When we
turn to the next smaller cycle, the 384-day lunar year, the problem is made
more complicated by the obvious loss of objectivity. Logical extension of
this idea would indicate that the terminal 6-day cycle should be as much a
condensation of the themes of the last 384-day cycle as that cycle is of the
last 67-plus-year cycle, or as that is to the last 4,306-year cycle. Although
more than 72 billion years are necessary for the first six quantized transi-
tions of level, those remaining, though continuing the same mathematical
progression, require only 384 days to complete themselves. In other words,
half of the becoming of the 72-plus-billion-year-old universe, half of the
unfoldment of the hierarchically structured totality of its laws, will occur,
given the correctness of these time cycles, during the last .3 seconds of its
existence. The rise of life, the appearance of civilization, the discovery of
atomic energy, each represents the revelatory interval associated with
crossing one of the quantized barriers to condensation into the next
smaller cycle; yet in the last 135 minutes, eighteen such barriers will be
crossed, thirteen of them in the last 75 X 10[to the -4th power] seconds. Trying to imagine
what passage through these barriers might be like pushes one's imagina-
tion to the limit of hyperbole. The shorter twenty of the progressively
lengthening twenty-four cycles that comprise the entire temporal hierar-
chy occur within the last 384-day cycle.

The concept of a revelatory interval clarifies the idea that apparent mir-
acles, that is, extremely improbable occurrences, are actually instances
when the operating laws of one cycle achieve a sort of harmonic cancel-
lation with another cycle whose operating laws are more restrictive of
molecular activity. This understanding of the nature of miracles is that
they are instances when phenomenological modes common to different
temporal modalities than the one being experienced break in upon nat-
ural laws mistakenly assumed to be eternal constants, disrupting and dis-
torting them. This explanation applies equally to miracles of the sort
ascribed to Christ or Simon Magnus, or to such miracles as the existence

of life in a largely inorganic cosmos or the existence of consciousness in a
cosmos where such a complex level of organization is apparently rare.
Natural laws are not constants, but descriptions of statistical norms that
are valid only when applied within the limits of the specific epoch in
which they are encountered. This idea aids one trying to visualize the var-
ious levels of condensation through which this phenomenon will pass and
present itself as it moves, ever more rapidly, through the shortening
epochs.

Chapter 13

The Wave of Time

The idea model is complete in its outlines from particle to cosmos, but
nevertheless, what remains significantly outside understanding is the
process by which the nature of the present-at-hand will transform itself at
the onset of a major shift of epochs. Certain themes that we associate
with nonordinary reality or concrescent precursors have yet to be con-
nected with the events since March 1971. The speech-become-visible phe-
nomenon has played no real part in experiences since that time; yet it was
just that feature, the outstanding peculiarity of tryptamine ecstasy, that
led us to the Amazon originally (cf. p. 96). Triggering a flood of shared
mental imagery might be accomplished via vocally modulated audial phe-
nomena that would illuminate hologramatic images of the imagination-
modulated vibration from ionic tryptamines, especially serotonin,
metabolizing in vivo, perhaps in the pineal gland. We suggest that charge
transfer involving such tryptamine ions may be the chemical analogs or
the reflection in physical matter of ongoing processes of thought and idea
formation. A major shift of epochs might allow these audio-holograms to
become telepathically shared or to condense and appear as light or even
matter.

Up to now we have often opposed light and matter, the latter
being associated with mass and often with electricity, while the
former always appears free from inertia and charge. But if these
two fundamental entities of the physical world appear to oppose
one another, they are none the less related because they are both
special forms of energy. In principle, therefore, there is nothing
against the view that energy, while always conserving itself, can
pass from the material to the luminous form and vice versa. We
know today that it is actually so; this fact breaks down the barrier
which seemed to separate light and matter and, to complete the
enumeration of the fundamental properties which assure light a
privileged place amongst the physical entities, we can now add
that light is, in short, the most refined form of matter [italics his].
(de Broglie 1955, pp. 67-68)

The notion of concrescence signifies an abyss of ambiguity, for once
the monadic hierarchy enters the short epochs preceding concrescence,

the normal limitations of three dimensions will be obviated. In the last 2 1/4
hours of the duration of space-time, all of the cycles must, in some sense,
be repeated several times. What the last epochs of time will be like, as all
things are gathered and focused toward concrescence, remains mysterious.

We do not yet know whether the cycle of time we are studying is time
caused by the submolecular energy exchanges in living macromolecules, and
thus a biological phenomenon. We speculate that quantum-mechanical
constraints have configured life and imposed boundary conditions on it,
and that DNA is configured as it is because it reflects some quantum-
mechanical or astrophysical organizing principle that makes no discrimina-
tion between the organic and the inorganic but is as responsible for the
nature of nonorganic processes as it is for the manner in which the cell or
the mind is organized. If this is not the case, and the waveform applies ex-
clusively to DNA-based organisms, then this would return the problem of
the origin of the inanimate universe to the cosmologists, and thus fail in its
attempt to serve as a general theory of systems. The correlation of the me-
chanics of the wave to solar processes, lunar movements, and equinoctial
precession argues that to suppose this a systems theory of biological
processes exclusively is to make an unnecessarily limiting distinction.

Since the wave maps variables reflected in the organization of the psy-
che, it naturally has heuristic potential as a mnemonic engine. Surveying
and intensifying one's understanding concerning these retrogressing time
cycles is like a preliminary course in atemporal navigation. The standing
wave-hierarchy contains everything now in the state called active imagina-
tion; presumably, it will exist some time in the future as the state called ob-
jective, or shared, reality. Comprehension of this unity in a particular or
dynamic manner, rather than the quiescent and static total comprehension
of the entire information field represented as some kind of enstasis, is a
way of seeing, a shamanic path, and is accomplished through application
of right method to the unitary information field. Anyone using the
quantified frames of the hierarchy, especially when applying them to his-
tory or to the lunar year, should note that numbers rest on lines that desig-
nate days ; yet there are dawn lines, and the day lying between two
position numbers is a day that runs from dawn to dawn. The idea that
days begin and end at dawn is third century and Gnostic, according to
Jonas; later, it was carried over by Manichaeans. We adhere to this idea be-
cause during the experiment in March 1971, it was clear that, as far as daily
energy cycles in the environment are concerned, dawn and, secondarily,
dusk are the moments of the opening of the crack between the worlds.
In fact, after March 4, 1971, and until we left La Chorrera, the time of the

onset of maximum self-revelation of ingressing novelty was quite literally
concurrent with the sunrise, beginning at the crack of dawn each morn-
ing. This moment on our scale is the end of one day and the beginning of
another.

We believe that the importance of the dawn moment is rooted in the
relationship between light and living organisms. That such circadian or
daily cycles of light-induced metabolic fluctuations exist is well docu-
mented. Research has shown that 5HT (serotonin) in the pineal gland is
light synchronized. 5HT is the very metabolite that may allow us the ex-
perience of self-reflecting consciousness. This idea clarifies at the neuro-
humoral level the intuitive connection felt by all peoples between the
rising of the sun and the differentiation of the self out of unstructured
chaos; indeed, the connection may be one of cause and effect.

Pineal serotonin fluctuates, rising and falling in a daily rhythm.
Its persistence after blinding suggested that this rhythm is endoge-
nous but synchronized by light and dark. Like melatonin, its lev-
els in the pineal seemed to respond to light entering through the
eyes, transmitted as nerve messages along the inferior accessory
optic tract. But unlike melatonin, its increases and decreases were
not explained by enzyme activity. The story was evidently more
complex and interesting than anyone had forecast, for pineal sero-
tonin seemed to follow an endogenous, circadian rhythm that was
entrained by light and darkness in a manner not thoroughly un-
derstood. (Luce 1971, p. 126)

Thus, our understanding is that a maximum density of novel connec-
tion occurs at dawn in any cycle large enough to encompass at least one
dawn moment. This assertion might be investigated using the methods of
evaluation that J. B. Rhine developed to evaluate psychic phenomena.
A group tested only at the propitious moment each day might be easily
compared with a different group examined daily at a different time or
with a group whose testing had taken no account of the time the test was
administered.

The nearness of a major concrescence to our own time seems a self-
evident fact, implicit in the excesses of all sorts that characterize the history
of the twentieth century. Two methods for computing possible dates of a
future concrescence have been found suggestive. The first is simple and
involves simply propagating 67-plus—year cycles and their subsets forward
in time, with various shifts in the alignment of the scales. The software

implementation of the wave, Timewave Zero, allows any date to be stud-
ied, and appropriate computer programs could be written to search
among many dates for a best fit of quantified historical data to the
quantified wave-hierarchy. The problem with this, and all approaches of
this sort, lies in finding a method of quantifying historical data.

The second approach to a search of possible dates for future concrescence
is more subtle and takes account of the precession of the equinoxes
(cf. p. 130). Because of the precession, the solstice and equinoctial nodes pre-
cess or move backward against the background of the fixed stars that com-
prise the zodiac. In a 26,000-year zodiacal great year, the solstice and
equinoctial nodes move through the entire zodiac. It is a coincidence then
that in our own time, the winter solstice is placed in the constellation Sagit-
tarius, only about 3° from the galactic center, which, also coincidentally is
within 2° of the ecliptic. Because the winter solstice node is precessing, it is
moving closer and closer to the point on the ecliptic where it will eclipse the
galactic center. This will occur sometime in the next two hundred years. It is
difficult to be more accurate, since the term galactic center is ambiguous.
A degree covers a large area in space, and the galaxy may be presumed to
have a gravitational center, a radio center, and a spatial center. Nevertheless,
we suggest that the transition from one zodiacal era of approximately
twenty-two hundred years duration to the next may be hinged on the con-
junction of the solstice node and the galactic center. It is useful to examine
winter solstices on which solar eclipses will occur over the next two hundred
years, during which the earth's solstice node will be slowly transiting the area
of the galactic center. When this is done the most likely heliacal rising of the
galactic center with the solstice sun occurs on December 21, 2012. The
eclipse of the galactic center by the solstice sun might be an event unusual
enough to signal an onset of concrescence. If a causal connection were
shown, it would implicate the galaxy itself as a major formative influence
upon the structure of the molecules that maintain and define life. That such
a situation would have noticeable effects on life on earth is totally specula-
tive. However, ideas of such an archetypal nature do not arise except upon a
basis of biological organization.

The relation of a time of renewal to the conjunction of the solstice
nodes and the galactic center has been noted by others:

Considering the fact that the crossroads of ecliptic and Galaxy
are crisis-resistant, that is, not concerned with the Precession, the
reader may want to know why the Mangaians thought they could
go to heaven only on the two solstitial days. Because, in order

FIGURE 31

Half an hour before the winter solstice of December 21, 2012, the sun will rise at
La Chorrera (730 west, 43' south) in a position that will eclipse the galactic center.
The rising sun is caught in the crosshairs of the intersection of the plane of the
ecliptic with the ecliptical plane of our galaxy. This illustration was prepared
using Voyager 1.0 Desktop Planetarium from Carina Software of San Leandro,
California.

to change trains comfortably, the constellations that serve as
gates to the Milky Way must stand upon the earth, meaning
that they must rise heliacally either at the equinoxes or at the sol-
stices. The Galaxy is a very broad highway, but even so there must
have been some bitter millennia when neither gate was directly
available any longer, the one hanging in midair, the other having
turned into a submarine entrance.

Sagittarius and Gemini still mark the solstices in the closing
years of the Age of Pisces. Next comes Aquarius. The ancients, no
doubt, would have considered the troubles of these our times, the
overpopulation, the working iniquity in secret, as an inevitable

prelude to a new tilting, a new world-age. (de Santillana and von
Dechend 1969, p. 244)

Ideas of the sort that form the philosophical basis of our speculation
have reappeared again and again in Chinese thinking. They have been
given particularly eloquent expression in the thought of Fu-chih (1619-92),
whose mathematical extrapolation of the / Ching was familiar to Leibniz:

His premise is an ordered continuum of existence, which is
governed by laws and is all embracing. This continuum lacks
appearance —that is, it is not immediately accessible to sense
perception. But through the dynamism inherent in existence,
images are differentiated out of the continuum which by their
structure and position partake of the laws of the continuum; they
are, in a sense, individuations of this continuum. On the one
hand, these images—that is, the sixty-four situations of the Book
of Changes—can be perceived and experienced; on the other
hand, as embodiments of the law and therefore governed by it,
they are open to theoretical speculation. With this they enter into
the field of numbers and may be numerically structured and
ordered as objects of theory governed by law. Thus each situation
can be apprehended in two ways: through theoretical speculation
as a consequence of the continuousness of existence and its gov-
ernment by laws. The oracle serves to bring the two aspects into
harmony with each other, to co-ordinate a question resulting from
immediate, differentiated experience, with the theoretically cor-
rect—and the only correct—answer. The questioner thus obtains
access to the theoretically established aspect of his own situation,
and by reference to the texts set forth under this aspect in the
Book of Changes he obtains counsel and guidance from the expe-
rience of former generations and the insights of the great masters.
Thus the synchronicity disclosed by the oracle is merely the appre-
hension of two different modes of experiencing the same state of
affairs. (H. Wilhelm, in Campbell 1967, p. 219)

The material in the / Ching that comprises Book II and is traditionally
known as the Ten Wings represents the earliest commentary on the /
Ching extant. This material strongly indicates that the oracle originally
represented a perfected knowledge of the patterns through which change
manifests itself. The oldest texts indicate this through references to

processes involving the / Ching that cannot be construed as simply refer-
ring to the traditional yarrow stalk oracle; that is, The future likewise de-
velops in accordance with the fixed laws, according to calculable numbers.
If these numbers are known, future events can be calculated with perfect accu-
racy. This is the thought on which the Book of Changes is based (R. Wil-
helm 1964, p. 323) [italics mine]. Another commentary, which Richard
Wilhelm calls probably very ancient, pursues this theme: . . . counting
that which is going into the past depends on the forward movement.
Knowing that which is to come depends on the backward movement.
This is why the Book of Changes has backward moving numbers (1964,
p. 285). These statements can become rationally apprehendible only if we
assume that the author had in mind construing the order of the hexa-
grams into some configuration approximate to the configuration that the
wave-hierarchy suggests, the configuration suggested by the structure of a
hexagram. The whole spirit of the / Ching is one pervaded by the atempo-
ral assumption; indeed, the final words of Book I remind us that this is a
book of the future. Like the Adamic speculations of the Iranian light re-
ligious, the / Ching suggests that its final fulfillment lies in the focus it
might be given in a unique personality. In regard to this latter, it is said of
the energy in the images: When it comes upon the right man, one who
has inner relationship with this tao, it can forthwith be taken by him and
awakened to new life. This is the concept of the supernatural connection
between the elect of all ages (R. Wilhelm 1964, p. 349).

Chapter 14

Evolution and Freedom

Like every major theory, the contemporary theory of evolution and genetics is
an intricate combination of fact, hypothesis, and deduction. In the category
of established fact belongs evolution as such: that species do change, have
emerged in series of changes from ancestral forms, and in their entirety form
a branching family system of common descent in which the simple precedes
the complex, and transitions are gradual. Also an ascertained fact is the oc-
currence of mutations; but not their nature or cause. Natural selection is a
logical deduction from the two premises of competition and of differences in
competitors, which themselves are facts. The chance-character of mutations
is a hypothesis: the inducement of some of them by external forces, such as
radiation, is a fact of laboratory experience, but the claim that these are rep-
resentative of all of them and for their underlying dynamics is a mere trial
with Occam's razor, and the sufficiency of this kind of variability for the
emergence of the major plans of organization is, so far, more a metaphysical
contention (or, more soberly, a methodological postulate) than a scientific hy-
pothesis—if hypothesis implies construction of at least a mentally workable
model. [italics ours] (Jonas 1966, p. 44f.)

We have already shown the application of the waveform to short-term as-
tronomical movements and the precession of the equinoxes. It seems,
therefore, not unreasonable to assume that it is applicable to other phe-
nomena of longer duration. In the light of the above, we have examined
the history of the fossil record to determine if major evolutionary events
are reflected in the quantifications of the modular wave-hierarchy on the
1.3-billion-year scale, for if the wave-hierarchy controls the emergent evo-
lutionary properties of life in a given moment, it must do so through the
control of mutation. Agreement between the quantified temporal graph
and fossil record, if substantially proven, would erode orthodox evolution-
ary theory, which leans on the hypothesis of chance mutation. In the fol-
lowing quotation from L. L. Whyte (1965), we infer that low temperature
quantum mechanical systems refers to the temperatures where organism
and metabolism are met:

. . . tendency towards the formation of more complex unified
patterns does not imply any obscure vitalistic factor, since in

appropriate circumstances it can be the direct result of the ten-
dency towards arrangements of minimal potential energy. Thus
the potential energy principle can, in complex low temperature
quantum mechanical systems, produce a structuring or formative
tendency which, under certain conditions, will shape the genetic
system towards novel, stable, unified arrangements. Arbitrary
changes in the genetic system may thus be reformed into favorable
mutations satisfying the Coordinative Conditions. (p. 56)

We have already indicated our belief that the modular wave-hierarchy
we have elaborated may be the system that can supply mathematical rigor
to the idea of the Coordinative Conditions.

If, as Jonas (1966) says, for an evolutionary doctrine to be a scientific
one it is essential that the dynamics involved do not contain any element
of teleology, or preformative disposition, or aspiration toward the higher
forms to come but that they 'evolve' those higher forms without their
being in any way 'involved' on the initial stage (p. 43), then this theory,
positing as it does preformation and atemporality of life at its own subjec-
tive substratum, seeks to reintroduce teleology to contemporary thought
at the expense of the satisfying, but logically unfounded, reliance upon
the idea of temporal invariance, which is the foundation of science and
scientific notions of proof.

Organism is a state wherein matter appears to function, in part, with
teleological characteristics associated with the self-experience of mind and
banned from the assumptions of causal materialism. Mind, whose self-
expectation is satisfied by freedom (the becoming and goal of its teleol-
ogy), discovers itself in experience, functioning in a situation in part (in
res extensa) causal. Thus, the teleological completion of mind (freedom in
itself), when in interphase with matter, creates the still unresolved philo-
sophical paradox that organic life represents. Having an interior horizon
of transcendence (mind) and the causal encumbrances of physical exten-
sion no different from that possessed by nonliving matter, the body is a
paradoxical union of opposites. However, the self-experienced teleology
inherent in mind suggests that the teleological perspective may be a
primary intuition of emerging concrescence. Perhaps it is not the mechan-
istic fiat of random mutation and adaptive selection that imparts apparent
teleology to organic nature, but rather the hierarchical structure of time
expressing its structure-goal as the shock wave of being in time. The tel-
eological pattern operates in each organism and is recapitulated in the

general character of the evolutionary enterprise. This pattern represents
and gives direction to the seeking of itself, which is equivalent to with-
drawal from effects in the res extensa, and which, as process, the process
called life, actually does impart a preformative teleology to an otherwise
mechanistic, causal, and entropy-seeking system, the res extensa. If the me-
chanics of mutation were shown to be nonrandom and ordered according
to this wave-hierarchy (or any other preformative schema), then the pri-
mary role of time in imparting teleology to life—via the modulation of
the density of the coincident events that cause mutation—would be
clearly indicated.

To gain perspective on the ideas presented in this work and to reduce
them to a series of propositions that can be examined independently of
each other, we present a tentative minimal description of our experiment
and its premises:

1. The tryptamines, primarily 5HT (serotonin), and the beta-
carbolines, primarily harmine, offer an informational readout through
molecular intercalation into, neural nucleic acids and molecular broadcast
of the ESR waveform of information hypothetically stored in the neural
nucleus. In the case of 5HT, this ESR signal represents the electrochemi-
cal basis for consciousness as it is typically experienced. The case of
harmine is different. The ESR signal seems to carry more information
than does the 5HT ESR of normal serotonin metabolism. The refinement
of information output and recall quality that attends the shift of normal
5HT levels in favor of harmine and related compounds marks, we sug-
gest, an adaptative advance of considerable significance. The levels of
5HT and beta-carbolines in human neural tissue may be undergoing a
steady shift in the direction of increased beta-carboline secretion and in-
creased inhibition of 5HT. This shift is responsible for the advance of
consciousness, consciousness being the self-perceived phenomenon atten-
dant upon the improving ESR resolution of the informational hologram
of species' experience stored in DNA. The artificially induced inhibition
of MAO and the simultaneous rise in beta-carboline levels in the brain
that accompany ingestion of Banisteriopsis spp. infusions are thus a means
of briefly inducing a state that may anticipate future adaptations of
human consciousness, adaptations refined through evolutionary selection
working among the various ESR transmitters that intercalate into DNA
and RNA. The experience attendant upon harmine intercalation differs
from normal consciousness but is experienced superimposed over it. The

harmine-induced ESR modulation registers as a higher cortical experi-
ence, intellectually understood as a continuously self-defining totality
symbol, represented through time on any of an infinite number of possi-
ble symbolic levels.

2.  This phenomenon can be entirely stabilized. Stability is achieved
through permanently bonding the harmine resonance unit into DNA and
is directly maintained through endogenous synthesis. Stability is achieved
through techniques using audilely induced ESR harmonic canceling.

3.  During the application of these techniques, the owner of the DNA
so treated will spontaneously produce ever more complete analogical de-
scriptions of the configuration and interrelations of the energy patterns
stored in the structure of DNA, patterns that imbue life with its character-
istically preformative, actually atemporal, teleology. The subject feels these
ideas to be arising from a source outside the ego, but within her- or him-
self. The subject experiences the imminent presence of an agency, imper-
sonal and without limitation, that produces these ideas. He or she not only
feels this agency to be the more-than-cybernetic matrix of the DNA but
also the nonego information source assures the subject that this is the
case. Further, it offers ever more elaborate models of itself, which are not
only descriptions of a static goal that will represent complete concrescence
but also, and inherently, these models act predictively relative to when this
completion will be achieved. They offer a description of the shifting
boundary conditions that will necessarily modify all the temporal mo-
ments that separate the present from this completion. These necessary
boundary conditions may be mapped through a series of mathematical op-
erations performed on the / Ching: the time graph, its quantification, and
the quantified modular hierarchy of which it is the basic unit.

We have assumed for some time a predictable moment of concres-
cence. This idea poses no difficulties for a view seeking to preserve the
self-evident phenomenon of free will. The idea of purpose is everywhere
in a nature reductionist methods have shown to be nonredundant, and it
is a matter of common experience that one may make choices and pursue
good or bad influences. Humans, subject to the conditions and condi-
tioning of their environment and nature, neither of which nor both to-
gether represent an absolute determinism, are free. Human beings are free
as to how they are fulfilled; they freely choose from the possibilities inher-
ing within the imposed boundary conditions of the situations in which
they find themselves, and they realize their choices.

That each entity in the universe of a given concrescence can, so far
as its own nature is concerned, be implicated in that concrescence
in one or other of many modes; but in fact it is implicated only in
one mode: that the particular mode of implication is only ren-
dered fully determinate by that concrescence, though it is condi-
tioned by the correlate universe. This indetermination, rendered
determinate in the real concrescence, is the meaning of potential-
ity. It is a conditioned indetermination, and is therefore called a
real potentiality. (Whitehead 1969, p. 27)

Humankind is not, however, free to choose the when of its completion.
The actual moment of concrescence is a property of the most inclusive
epoch. In the modular hierarchy of time, it is an imposed fact. Time must
be well used; this is a basis for a possible theory of ethics. But even time
well used still hurries us and all beings to its own conclusion. To preserve
this perception and the idea of a matter- and history-conditioning atem-
poral interspecies bio-electronic hologram with a temporally expressed
and mathematically describable unfolding, it is necessary to take the fol-
lowing view of humankinds freedom to act and the immutability of the
order and rate of novel ingressions. Such ingressions only define boundary
conditions. In the unfolding of novel ingressions, there are moments of
maximum propitiousness. As the probability of a time of renewal intensi-
fies, who can doubt the possibility that humanity, through an act of free
will, may anticipate the new epoch? All philosophy springs from the idea
that the human mind is the measure and leading edge of all things. And it
is with poetry and philosophy that we must take that measure.

May it not be that the Tao leaves creation unfinished, and humans,
who appear according to the will of Tao, are given further levels of cre-
ation to weave—the mode of the completion of each level more and more
a matter of human decision, of the decisions of visionary humanity? Now
the time of rebirth has come upon the world again, and though these
years open wide their solstices and eclipses and windows to the ideas, yet,
finally, the manner in which we present ourselves in that cumulatively in-
tense final moment may well be a personal decision. Time grows ever
more short; in the cosmic year-day of history, dawn is already breaking
over Jerusalem.

Epilogue

There can be no certainty at all concerning the outcome of this investiga-
tion, nor can a reason be given why this particular idea complex has ap-
propriated our attention. Why does it exist so autonomously if it has no
meaning? Yet if it has meaning other than the inevitable transformation
that is its message, what might that meaning be? We include this experi-
ence in the category of vision such as Blake and Zosimus experienced or,
in a different context, such as Wallace or Descartes knew, yet this vision
has sought to reveal the mechanics of the phenomenon of vision itself,
and by way of making its point, it offers a hierarchical model of time and
a new attempt to understand organism and mind. Unlike poetry, and
more like science (though teleological structure is unwelcome in scientific
speculation), this idea inherently implies its own testability. Indeed, the
test is self-imposed by the temporal limits of the idea. If it fails the test,
what can possibly have been its raison d'etre? Would it not then be a rather
Mephistophelian comment on the idea that nature does nothing in vain?
The / Ching, which has been indispensable in the formulation of this the-
ory, says of itself:

Its principles contain the categories of all that is—literally the
molds and the scope of all transformations. These categories are
in the mind of man; everything, all that happens and everything
that undergoes transformation, must obey the laws prescribed by
the mind of man . . . fate can be shaped if its laws are known . . .
reality is always conditioned, and these conditions of time and
space limit and determine it. The Spirit however is not bound by
these determinants and can bring them about as its own purpose
requires. (R, Wilhelm 1964, p. 319)

However,

A point of reference must be established, and this always requires
a choice and a decision. It makes possible a system of coordinates
into which everything else can be fitted . . . The problem, then,
is to choose one's point of reference so that it coincides with the

point of reference for cosmic events. For only then can the world
created by one's decision escape being dashed to pieces against the
prepotent systems of relationships with which it would otherwise
come into conflict. (R. Wilhelm 1964, p. 302.)

Shamanism and the experiment at La Chorrera are not mere theoretical
aberrations but are precursors of the ways and means by which conscious-
ness will eventually organize its dominants to overthrow the modern on-
tology of reductionism and arise reborn in an atemporalized and holistic
mode of understanding. The search for a general theory of systems is
nothing less than the seeking of an encounter with the divine image con-
ceived as understanding. It is the quest par excellence and has always been
so. Reality is ever complete in itself and always points beyond itself; the
complete resolution of this paradox and the understanding it will bring
are now nearer than ever before in the long history of our planet. The
Confucian commentary on the Image for hexagram 54, Kuei Mei, The
Marrying Maiden, hopefully prefigures the deliverance of final time:

In the autumn everything comes to its end. When thunder
is over the lake, the end is near. The eternity of the end is sug-
gested by the trigram Chen, which comes forth in the east
(spring) and reaches the end of its activity in the west (autumn),
in accordance with fixed laws. At that moment the death dealing
power of autumn, which destroys all transient beings, becomes
active. Through knowledge of these laws, one reaches those
regions which are beyond beginning and end, birth and death
(R. Wilhelm 1964, p. 316)

Let the times fulfill humanity's most ancient hope. We cannot say that
it shall not be (fig. 32).

ANTHROPOLOGY

Dense. Technical. Fascinating. Infuriating. Marvelously weird___[Comparable to] an

alchemical text published in the classic period—the seventeenth century—before the bonds
linking science and magic were severed....

— from the Foreword by JAY STEVENS, author of Storming Heaven and
coauthor of Drumming at the Edge of Magic

The first work of cyberethnopharmacology.

— MICHAEL HOROWITZ, director of the Fitz Hugh Ludlow Memorial library

A tour-de-force investigation of hallucinogenic states of consciousness that combines
ethnobotanical research, shamanic exploration, alchemical spirit-world initiations, extra-
terrestrial contact and mathematical formulations of an IChing-based precognition system,
with edge-of-the-seat jungle adventures.

— RALPH METZNER, Ph.D., author of Opening to Inner Light

One of the most mind-boggling books I've ever read.
—-JERRY GARCIA

Put simply, Terence is a hoot.
—ESQUIRE

Newly available and thoroughly revised, this early work by Terence and Dennis
McKenna reveals the roots of the daring but disciplined speculations that
prompted The New York Times to call Terence the Timothy Leary (and much
more) of the discreetly psychedelic 90s, and Tom Robbins to proclaim him
the most important—and most entertaining—visionary scholar in America.

TERENCE MCKENNA, author of True Hallucinations, Food of the Gods,
and The Archaic Revival, is an ethnobotanist who has spent twenty-five years studying
shamanism and ethnopharmacology.

DENNIS MCKENNA is an ethnobotanist and neurobiologist.